User manual

ManualsBrandsKEITHLEY ManualsLaboratory & Bench PSUsBench PSU (adjustable voltage) 2611A 0 - 200 V 0 - 10 A

www.keithley.com

Series 2600B

System SourceMeter

Instrument

Reference Manual

2600BS-901-01 Rev. B / May 2013

*P2600BS90101B*

2600BS-901-01

A Tektr onix Company

A Greater Mesure of Condence

Summary of content (864 pages)

PAGE 1
www.keithley.com Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual 2600BS-901-01 Rev.
PAGE 2
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual © 2011-2013, Keithley Instruments, Inc. Cleveland, Ohio, U.S.A. All rights reserved. Any unauthorized reproduction, photocopy, or use of the information herein, in whole or in part, without the prior written approval of Keithley Instruments, Inc. is strictly prohibited. ® ® ® TSP , TSP-Link , and TSP-Net are trademarks of Keithley Instruments, Inc.
PAGE 3
Safety precautions The following safety precautions should be observed before using this product and any associated instrumentation. Although some instruments and accessories would normally be used with nonhazardous voltages, there are situations where hazardous conditions may be present. This product is intended for use by qualified personnel who recognize shock hazards and are familiar with the safety precautions required to avoid possible injury.
PAGE 4
For safety, instruments and accessories must be used in accordance with the operating instructions. If the instruments or accessories are used in a manner not specified in the operating instructions, the protection provided by the equipment may be impaired. Do not exceed the maximum signal levels of the instruments and accessories, as defined in the specifications and operating information, and as shown on the instrument or test fixture panels, or switching card.
PAGE 5
Table of Contents Introduction ............................................................................................................... 1-1 Welcome .............................................................................................................................. 1-1 Extended warranty ............................................................................................................... 1-1 Contact information ........................................................................
PAGE 6
Table of Contents Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Contact check connections ..................................................................................................... 2-54 Multiple SMU connections ....................................................................................................... 2-55 Combining SMU outputs ......................................................................................................... 2-59 Guarding and shielding ........
PAGE 7
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Overview ................................................................................................................................. 3-20 Sweep characteristics ............................................................................................................. 3-22 Configuring and running sweeps ............................................................................................. 3-29 Sweeping using factory scripts ........
PAGE 8
Table of Contents Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Pulse rise and fall times .......................................................................................................... 4-27 Pulse width .............................................................................................................................. 4-28 Introduction to TSP operation.................................................................................. 5-1 Introduction to TSP operation ..
PAGE 9
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Introduction ............................................................................................................................. 6-11 What is Lua? ........................................................................................................................... 6-11 Lua basics ............................................................................................................................... 6-11 Standard libraries .
PAGE 10
Table of Contents Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Example section ........................................................................................................................ 7-6 Related commands and information.......................................................................................... 7-6 TSP commands .................................................................................................................... 7-7 beeper.beep()...............
PAGE 11
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual digio.writebit() .......................................................................................................................... 7-58 digio.writeport() ....................................................................................................................... 7-59 digio.writeprotect ..................................................................................................................... 7-60 display.clear() ....
PAGE 12
Table of Contents Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual io.close()................................................................................................................................ 7-106 io.flush() ................................................................................................................................ 7-107 io.input() ................................................................................................................................
PAGE 13
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual localnode.revision ................................................................................................................. 7-143 localnode.serialno ................................................................................................................. 7-144 localnode.showerrors ............................................................................................................ 7-145 makegetter() .......................
PAGE 14
Table of Contents Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual smuX.contact.calibratelo() ..................................................................................................... 7-192 smuX.contact.check()............................................................................................................ 7-193 smuX.contact.r() .................................................................................................................... 7-194 smuX.contact.speed...
PAGE 15
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual smuX.trigger.measure.stimulus ............................................................................................. 7-242 smuX.trigger.measure.Y() ..................................................................................................... 7-244 smuX.trigger.MEASURE_COMPLETE_EVENT_ID .............................................................. 7-244 smuX.trigger.PULSE_COMPLETE_EVENT_ID ..........................................
PAGE 16
Table of Contents Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual SweepILogMeasureV() ......................................................................................................... 7-331 SweepVLinMeasureI()........................................................................................................... 7-332 SweepVListMeasureI() .......................................................................................................... 7-333 SweepVLogMeasureI() ............
PAGE 17
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual tspnet.tsp.runscript() ............................................................................................................. 7-376 tspnet.write() ......................................................................................................................... 7-376 userstring.add() ..................................................................................................................... 7-377 userstring.catalog() ......
PAGE 18
Table of Contents Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Next steps ............................................................................................................... 10-1 Additional Series 2600B information .................................................................................. 10-1 Maintenance ..............................................................................................................A-1 Introduction .......................................
PAGE 19
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Confirming the active speed and duplex negotiation ...............................................................C-14 Confirming port numbers .........................................................................................................C-15 Selecting a LAN interface protocol ..................................................................................... C-15 VXI-11 connection ....................................................
PAGE 20
Table of Contents Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Display character codes ........................................................................................... F-1 Series 2600B display character codes................................................................................. F-1 Model 2400 emulation.............................................................................................. G-1 Model 2400 emulation ................................................
PAGE 21
Section 1 Introduction In this section: Welcome .................................................................................. 1-1 Extended warranty ................................................................... 1-1 Contact information .................................................................. 1-1 CD-ROM contents .................................................................... 1-2 Capabilities and features ..........................................................
PAGE 22
Section 1: Introduction Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual CD-ROM contents Two CD-ROMs are shipped with each Series 2600B order. The Series 2600B Quick Start Guide and Reference Manual are provided in PDF format on the Series 2600B Product Information CD-ROM. • Quick Start Guide: Provides unpacking instructions, describes basic connections, and reviews basic operation information.
PAGE 23
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 1: Introduction Capabilities and features ® All Series 2600B System SourceMeter instruments have the following features: • • • • • • • • 4.5, 5.5, or 6.
PAGE 24
Section 1: Introduction Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Additional source and measure features: • • • ® Model 2601B/2602B/2604B System SourceMeter instruments: • Source ±DC voltage from 5 µV to 40.4 V • Source ±DC current from 2 pA to 3.03 A • Source ±pulse current up to 10 A • Measure ±pulse current up to 10 A • Measure ±DC voltage from 100 nV to 40.8 V • Measure ±DC current from 100 fA to 3.
PAGE 25
Section 2 General operation In this section: General ratings......................................................................... 2-1 Controls, indicators, and connectors ........................................ 2-2 Cooling vents ......................................................................... 2-12 Turning your instrument on and off ........................................ 2-13 System information ................................................................ 2-15 Menu overview ...............
PAGE 26
Section 2: General operation Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Controls, indicators, and connectors Series 2600B controls, indicators, and the USB port are on the front panel. Make connections to the Series 2600B through connectors on the rear panel (on page 2-6). Front panel The front panel of the Series 2600B is shown below. The descriptions of the front-panel controls, USB port, and indicators follow the figure.
PAGE 27
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 2: General operation 1. Power switch, display and configuration keys Power switch. The in position turns the Series 2600B on (I); the out position turns it off (O). Toggles between the various source-measure displays and the user message mode. Configures a function or operation. 2.
PAGE 28
Section 2: General operation Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Number keys When enabled and in EDIT mode, the number keys (0-9, +/-, 0000) allow direct numeric entry. Press the navigation wheel to enter EDIT mode. 3. Range keys Selects the next higher source or measure range. Enables or disables source or measure autorange. Selects the next lower source or measure range.
PAGE 29
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 2: General operation 8. Display indicators (not shown) The items listed below represent the possible display indicators and their meanings.
PAGE 30
Section 2: General operation Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Rear panel The rear panel of the Series 2600B is shown below. The descriptions of the rear-panel components follow the figure. Figure 2: Rear panel (Models 2601B, 2602B, 2611B, and 2612B) 2-6 2600BS-901-01 Rev.
PAGE 31
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 2: General operation Figure 3: Rear panel (Models 2604B and 2614B) 2600BS-901-01 Rev.
PAGE 32
Section 2: General operation Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Figure 4: Rear panel (Models 2634B and 2635B) 2-8 2600BS-901-01 Rev.
PAGE 33
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 2: General operation Figure 5: Rear panel (Model 2636B) 2600BS-901-01 Rev.
PAGE 34
Section 2: General operation Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual 1. SMU connector Channel A 2601B/2602B/2604B/2611B/2612B/2614B Channel B 2602B/2604B/2612B/2614B Channel A 2634B/2635B/2636B This connector provides input/output connections for HI and LO, sense (S HI/S LO), and guard (G).
PAGE 35
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 2: General operation 3. Digital I/O 2601B/2602B/2611B/2612B/2635B/2636B Female DB-25 connector. Use a cable equipped with a male DB-25 connector (Keithley Instruments part number CA-126-1). Pins provided: Fourteen digital input or output pins, seven GND pins, and three +5 V pins. The Models 2601B and 2602B have an output enable pin. The Models 2611B, 2612B, 2635B, and 2636B have an interlock pin.
PAGE 36
Section 2: General operation Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual 8. TSP-Link Expansion interface that allows a Series 2600B and other TSP-enabled instruments to trigger and communicate with each other. Use a category 5e or higher LAN crossover cable (Keithley Instruments part number CA-180-3A). The TSP-Link is not available on the Models 2604B, 2614B, and 2634B. 9. Power module Contains the AC line receptacle and power line fuse.
PAGE 37
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 2: General operation To prevent damaging heat build-up and ensure specified performance, use the following guidelines. The rear exhaust vent and either the top or both side intake vents must be unobstructed to properly dissipate heat. Even partial blockage could impair proper cooling. DO NOT position any devices adjacent to the Series 2600B that force air (heated or unheated) toward its cooling vents or surfaces.
PAGE 38
Section 2: General operation Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual The power cord supplied with the Series 2600B contains a separate protective earth (safety ground) wire for use with grounded outlets. When proper connections are made, the instrument chassis is connected to power-line ground through the ground wire in the power cord. In addition, a protective earth (safety ground) connection is provided through a screw on the rear panel.
PAGE 39
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 2: General operation Line frequency configuration The factory configures the Series 2600B to automatically detect the power line frequency (either 50 Hz or 60 Hz) at each power-up. This detected line frequency is used for aperture (NPLC) calculations. In noisy environments, you can manually configure the instrument to match the actual line frequency. To configure the line frequency from the front panel: 1.
PAGE 40
Section 2: General operation Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Menu overview Menu navigation To navigate through the menus and submenus, the Series 2600B must not be in edit mode (the EDIT indicator is not illuminated). Selecting menu items To navigate the Main and Configuration menus, use the editing keys as follows: • • • • Press either CURSOR arrow key to highlight an option. Rotate the navigation wheel (clockwise or counter-clockwise) to highlight an option.
PAGE 41
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 2: General operation Main menu The main menu structure is summarized in the following figure and table. For other menu items, see Configuration menus (on page 2-19). Figure 6: Main menu tree 2600BS-901-01 Rev.
PAGE 42
Section 2: General operation Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual The following table contains descriptions of the main menu options and cross-references to related information. To access a menu option, press the MENU key, turn the navigation wheel to move the cursor to select an item, and press the navigation wheel .
PAGE 43
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 2: General operation Configuration menus The configuration menu structure is summarized in the following figure and table. For directions on navigating the menu, see Menu navigation (on page 2-16). For other menu items, see Main menu (on page 2-17). Figure 7: CONFIG menu tree (models with a single SMU) 2600BS-901-01 Rev.
PAGE 44
Section 2: General operation Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Figure 8: CONFIG menu tree (models with two SMUs) 2-20 2600BS-901-01 Rev.
PAGE 45
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 2: General operation Press the EXIT key to return to a previous menu. The following table contains descriptions of the configuration menus, as well as cross-references to related information. To select a menu for single SMU instruments, press the CONFIG key and then the front-panel key associated with the menu (see the description column in the following table).
PAGE 46
Section 2: General operation Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Numeric entry method: The numeric entry method may only be used if the numeric keypad is enabled. To set a value to zero, press the 0000 numeric entry key. To toggle the polarity of a value, press the +/– numeric entry key. 1. If the keypad is disabled, press the MENU key, then select DISPLAY > NUMPAD > ENABLE. 2. Use the CURSOR arrow keys (or turn the navigation wheel that needs to be changed.
PAGE 47
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 2: General operation To edit compliance limit values: 1. Press the LIMIT key. 2. Use the CURSOR keys (or turn the navigation wheel ) to move the cursor to the digit that needs to be changed. 3. Press the navigation wheel or the ENTER key to enter edit mode. The EDIT indicator is illuminated. 4. Change the compliance value (see Setting values (on page 2-21)). 5. When finished, press the ENTER key (the EDIT indicator is not illuminated).
PAGE 48
Section 2: General operation Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Display mode Use the DISPLAY key to scroll through the various display modes shown in the figure below. Refer to Display operations (on page 3-71) for more information about the display. For the Models 2602B, 2604B, 2612B, 2614B, 2634B, and 2636B only, press the DISPLAY key more than once to cycle through the dual channel and single channel display modes. This applies to CHANNEL A (SMU A) and CHANNEL B (SMU B).
PAGE 49
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 2: General operation Operation overview Before you begin any of the following front panel procedures, make sure that you exit out of the menu structure. Press the EXIT (LOCAL) key as many times as needed to return to the main display.
PAGE 50
Section 2: General operation Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Voltage and current The following table lists the source and measure limits for the voltage and current functions. The full range of operation is explained in Operating boundaries (on page 4-4). Source-measure capabilities Model 2601B/2602B Model 2611B/2612B Model 2635B/2636B Range Source Measure Range Source Measure Range Source Measure 100 mV 1V 6V 40 V ±101 mV ±1.01 V ±6.06 V ±40.4 V ±102 mV ±1.
PAGE 51
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Max Power = 40.4 W per channel Section 2: General operation Max Power = 30.603 W per channel Max Power = 30.603 W per channel 1. 3. 2. 200 V source range available only when 200 V source range available only when interlock is enabled. See Digital I/O (on page interlock is enabled. See Digital I/O (on page 3- 3-83). 83). 10 A range available only in pulse mode.
PAGE 52
Section 2: General operation Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Setting the limit Front-panel limit Set the limit from the front panel as follows: 1. For the Model 2601B/2611B/2635B or the Model 2602B/2604B/2612B/2614B/2634B/2636B single-channel display mode, press the LIMIT key to directly access limit editing. Pressing the LIMIT key while in limit edit mode will toggle the display between the complementary function limit and the power limit display. 2.
PAGE 53
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 2: General operation Sink operation Carefully consider and configure the appropriate output-off state, source, and compliance limits before connecting the Series 2600B to a device that can deliver energy (for example, other voltage sources, batteries, capacitors, solar cells, or other Series 2600B instruments). Configure recommended instrument settings before making connections to the device.
PAGE 54
Section 2: General operation Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Setting the sink mode from the remote interface To enable or disable sink mode from the remote interface: The programming example below illustrates how to enable sink mode (to disable, set the attribute to smua.DISABLE): smua.source.sink = smua.ENABLE Fundamental circuit configurations The fundamental source-measure configurations for the Series 2600B are shown in the following figure.
PAGE 55
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 2: General operation Autozero The ADC of the Series 2600B uses a ratiometric A/D conversion technique. To ensure accuracy of readings, the instrument must periodically obtain fresh measurements of its internal ground and voltage reference. Separate reference and zero measurements are used for each aperture. As summarized in the "Autozero settings" table, there are three different settings for autozero.
PAGE 56
Section 2: General operation Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Remote command autozero To set autozero from a remote interface: Use the autozero command with the appropriate option shown in the following table to set autozero through a remote interface (see smuX.measure.autozero (on page 7-199)). For example, send the following command to activate channel A automatic reference measurements: smua.measure.autozero = smua.
PAGE 57
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 2: General operation Step 1: Select and set the source level Perform the following steps to select the source and edit the source value: 1. Press the SRC key as needed to select the voltage source or current source, as indicated by the units in the source field on the display. The flashing digit (cursor) indicates which value is presently selected for editing. 2.
PAGE 58
Section 2: General operation Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Step 5: Observe readings on the display. Press the TRIG key if necessary to trigger the instrument to begin taking readings. The readings are on the top line, and source and limit values are on the bottom line. Step 6: Turn the output off When finished, turn the output off by pressing the OUTPUT ON/OFF control. The OUTPUT indicator light switches off.
PAGE 59
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 2: General operation Requesting readings You can request readings by including the appropriate measurement command as the argument for the print() command. The following programming example illustrates how to request a Channel A current reading: print(smua.measure.
PAGE 60
Section 2: General operation Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Triggering in local mode It is not necessary to change any trigger settings to use the basic source and measurement procedures covered in this section. Press the MENU key, and then select SETUP > RECALL > INTERNAL > FACTORY to reset the factory default conditions. The following figure shows the general sequence for measurement triggering.
PAGE 61
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 2: General operation COUNT: Sets the trigger count (number of measurements) as follows: • FINITE: The instrument goes through measurement cycles for the programmed trigger count (1 to 99999). • INFINITE: The instrument goes through measurement cycles indefinitely until halted. INTERVAL: Sets the time interval between measurements (0 s to 999.999 s) when the count is greater than 1.
PAGE 62
Section 2: General operation Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual To manually configure the settings, refer to the applicable topics: • • • V-meter and I-meter measurements (on page 2-38) Ohms measurements (on page 2-38) Power measurements (on page 2-42) V-meter and I-meter measurements To make V-meter and I-meter measurements without using the MODE key (such as when configuring measure-only tests over the remote interface), follow the procedure below.
PAGE 63
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 2: General operation Ohms ranging The front panel ohms function does not use ranging. The instrument formats a calculated resistance reading (V/I) to best fit the display. There may be leading zeros if the ohms reading is less than 1 mΩ. Basic ohms measurement procedure When you use the MODE key to select ohms measurement, the Series 2600B is automatically configured as a current source with a level of 1 mA.
PAGE 64
Section 2: General operation Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Ohms programming example The following programming example illustrates the setup and command sequence of a typical ohms measurement procedure with the following parameters: • • • • Source function: current, 10 mA range, 10 mA output Voltage measure range: auto Voltage compliance: 10 V Sense mode: 4-wire -- Restore Series 2600B defaults. smua.reset() -- Select current source function. smua.source.func = smua.
PAGE 65
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 2: General operation Figure 12: 2-wire resistance sensing 2600BS-901-01 Rev.
PAGE 66
Section 2: General operation Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual The 4-wire sensing method, as shown in the following figure (4-wire resistance sensing), minimizes or eliminates the effects of lead resistance by measuring the voltage across the resistor under test with a second set of test leads.
PAGE 67
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 2: General operation Hazardous voltages may be present on the output and guard terminals. To prevent electrical shock that could cause injury or death, never make or break connections to the Series 2600B while the output is on. Power off the equipment from the front panel or disconnect the main power cord from the rear of the Series 2600B before handling cables connected to the outputs.
PAGE 68
Section 2: General operation Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual -- Restore Series 2600B defaults. smua.reset() -- Select voltage source function. smua.source.func = smua.OUTPUT_DCVOLTS -- Enable source autoranging. smua.source.autorangev = smua.AUTORANGE_ON -- Set voltage source to 5 V. smua.source.levelv = 5 -- Set current limit to 50 mA. smua.source.limiti = 50e-3 -- Set current range to auto. smua.measure.autorangei = smua.AUTORANGE_ON -- Turn on output. smua.source.
PAGE 69
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 2: General operation Figure 14: Contact check measurements Contact check commands The following table summarizes the basic contact check commands. For a more complete description of these commands, refer to the TSP command reference (on page 7-1). For connection information, refer to Contact check connections (on page 2-54). Basic contact check commands Command* Description flag = smuX.contact.check() rhi, rlo = smuX.contact.r() smuX.
PAGE 70
Section 2: General operation Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual -- Restore defaults. smua.reset() -- Set speed to fast. smua.contact.speed = smua.CONTACT_FAST -- Set threshold to 100 ohms. smua.contact.threshold = 100 -- Check contacts against threshold. if not smua.contact.check() then -- Set speed to slow. smua.contact.speed = smua.CONTACT_SLOW -- Get aggregate resistance readings. rhi, rlo = smua.contact.r() -- Return contact resistances to the host.
PAGE 71
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 2: General operation Recalling a saved setup You can recall setups from internal nonvolatile memory or a USB flash drive at any time. To recall a saved setup from the front panel: 1. Press the MENU key to access the main menu. 2. Select SETUP, and then press the ENTER key. 3. Select the RECALL menu item, and then press the ENTER key. 4.
PAGE 72
Section 2: General operation Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Restore all factory defaults (note that you cannot use *rst in a script): *rst Restore all factory defaults: setup.recall(0) Restore channel A defaults: smua.reset() Reset just the local TSP-Link node: localnode.reset() Start-up (power-on) configuration You can specify the Series 2600B start-up (power-on) configuration. Use the setup.poweron attribute to select which setup to return to upon power-up.
PAGE 73
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 2: General operation Hazardous voltages may be present on the output and guard terminals. To prevent electrical shock that could cause injury or death, never make or break connections to the Series 2600B while the output is on. Power off the equipment from the front panel or disconnect the main power cord from the rear of a System SourceMeter® instrument before handling cables connected to the outputs.
PAGE 74
Section 2: General operation Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Figure 15: Input/output connectors 2-50 2600BS-901-01 Rev.
PAGE 75
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 2: General operation Input/output LO and chassis ground As shown below, SMU input/output LOs are available at the rear panel terminal blocks. Input/output LOs are not connected between channels and are electrically isolated from chassis ground. As shown, there is a low-noise chassis ground banana jack that can be used as a common signal ground point for Input/Output LOs.
PAGE 76
Section 2: General operation Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Figure 17: Models 2634B and 2636B input/output and chassis ground terminals (Model 2635B similar) Figure 18: Models 2601B/2602B/2604B/2611B/2612B/2614B low-noise chassis ground banana jack and chassis screw 2-52 2600BS-901-01 Rev.
PAGE 77
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 2: General operation Figure 19: Model 2634B/2636B (Model 2635B similar) When connecting to Models 2611B, 2612B, 2614B, 2634B, 2635B, and 2636B SMU outputs using cables not rated for voltages above 42V, such as the 2600A-ALG-2, you must disable the high voltage output by using the INTERLOCK function as defined in Interlock (on page 389).
PAGE 78
Section 2: General operation Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual 4-wire remote sensing connections When sourcing and/or measuring voltage in a low-impedance test circuit, there can be errors associated with lead resistance. Voltage source and measure accuracy are optimized by using 4-wire remote sense connections. When sourcing voltage, 4-wire remote sensing ensures that the programmed voltage is delivered to the DUT.
PAGE 79
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 2: General operation Multiple SMU connections Carefully consider and configure the appropriate output-off state, source, and compliance limits before connecting the Series 2600B to a device that can deliver energy (for example, other voltage sources, batteries, capacitors, solar cells, or other Series 2600B instruments). Configure recommended instrument settings before making connections to the device.
PAGE 80
Section 2: General operation Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Figure 23: Two SMUs (Model 2634B or 2636B) connected to a 3-terminal device (local sensing, floating) 2-56 2600BS-901-01 Rev.
PAGE 81
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 2: General operation The following figure illustrates using three SMUs to test the same 3-terminal device. The third SMU is connected to the source (S) terminal of the JFET. This allows the source terminal to be biased above signal LO. Setting this SMU to output 0 V effectively connects the source terminal of the JFET to signal LO. Figure 24: Three SMUs connected to a 3-terminal device 2600BS-901-01 Rev.
PAGE 82
Section 2: General operation Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Figure 25: Three SMUs (Model 2634B or 2636B) connected to a 3-terminal device (local sensing, non-floating) 2-58 2600BS-901-01 Rev.
PAGE 83
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 2: General operation Combining SMU outputs The following information provides cautions and important considerations that need to be observed when combining SMU output channels. Use care when combining SMU channels. Whenever SMU channels are combined, it is best to use instruments with identical current and voltage envelopes/ranges.
PAGE 84
Section 2: General operation ® Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual SourceMeter instrument configuration Guidelines Source voltage using series SMUs Maximum Pulsed Signal Levels for Series 2600B: Model 2601B/2602B/2604B: 80 V with 1.35 A limit Model 2611B/2612B/2614B/2634B/2635B/2636B: 400 V with 900 mA limit SMU 1 configuration: Output-off mode: smuX.source.offmode = smuX.OUTPUT_NORMAL Output-off function: smuX.source.offfunc = smuX.
PAGE 85
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual ® Section 2: General operation SourceMeter instrument configuration Guidelines Source voltage with extended current using parallel SMUs Maximum Pulsed Signal Levels for Series 2600B: Model 2601B/2602B/2604B: 18 V with 18 A limit Model 2611B/2612B/2614B/2634B/2635B/2636B: 4.5 V with 18 A limit SMU 1 configuration: Output-off mode: smuX.source.offmode = smuX.OUTPUT_NORMAL Output-off function: smuX.source.offfunc = smuX.
PAGE 86
Section 2: General operation Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Higher pulse voltage can be output by connecting two (and only two) Series 2600B instrument channels in series. When combining two SMU channels, make sure both SMUs have the same model number. The following figure illustrates a Model 2612B configured with the two channels connected in series to output up to 400 V (200 V per channel).
PAGE 87
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 2: General operation The figure below illustrates the connection scheme of two Model 2602B channels connected in parallel. Two Model 2602B channels can output up to 20 A at 36 V (see Combining SMU outputs (on page 2-59)). The current delivered to the DUT is the sum of currents output by SMU channels (IT). Combining the two Series 2600B instrument channels expands the power envelope.
PAGE 88
Section 2: General operation Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Safety shielding and hazardous voltages Model 2601B/2602B/2604B: The maximum output voltage for a Model 2601B/2602B/2604B channel is 40 V, which is considered a nonhazardous level. However, using two Model 2601B/2602B/2604B voltage sources in a series configuration or floating a SMU can cause test circuit voltage to exceed 42 V.
PAGE 89
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 2: General operation Model 2611B/2612B/2614B/2634B/2635B/2636B: The maximum output voltage for a Model 2611B/2612B/2614B/2634B/2635B/2636B channel is 220 V, which is considered hazardous and requires a safety shield. The following figures illustrate test connections for these models. Use #18 AWG wire or larger for connections to protective earth (safety ground) and chassis.
PAGE 90
Section 2: General operation Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Figure 30: Model 2634B/2635B/2636B safety shield for hazardous voltage test circuit connections Guarding A driven guard is always enabled and provides a buffered voltage that is at the same level as the input/output HI voltage. The purpose of guarding is to eliminate the effects of leakage current (and capacitance) that can exist between HI and LO.
PAGE 91
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 2: General operation See Guard (on page 4-23) for details on the principles of guarding. Figure 31: Models 2602B, 2604B, 2612B,and 2614B high-impedance guarding 2600BS-901-01 Rev.
PAGE 92
Section 2: General operation Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Figure 32: Models 2634B and 2636B high-impedance guarding (floating) (Model 2635B is similar) 2-68 2600BS-901-01 Rev.
PAGE 93
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 2: General operation Figure 33: Model 2634B and 2636B high-impedance guarding (non-floating) (Model 2635B is similar) 2600BS-901-01 Rev.
PAGE 94
Section 2: General operation Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Noise shield Use a noise shield (see following figure) to prevent unwanted signals from being introduced into the test circuit. Low-level signals may benefit from effective shielding. The metal noise shield surrounds the test circuit and should be connected to LO, as shown.
PAGE 95
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 2: General operation Figure 36: Models 2634B and 2636B noise shield (non-floating) (Model 2635B similar) Using shielding and guarding together The following figures show connections for a test system that uses a noise shield, a safety shield, and guarding. The guard shields are connected to the driven guard (labeled G or GUARD, depending on your model) of the SMU. The noise shield is connected to LO.
PAGE 96
Section 2: General operation Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Figure 37: Connections for noise shield, safety shield, and guarding Test fixture A test fixture can be used to house a device or test circuit. The test fixture can be a metal or nonconductive enclosure, and is typically equipped with a lid. When properly used, the output of the Series 2600B will turn off when the lid of the test fixture is opened. The test circuit is mounted inside the test fixture.
PAGE 97
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 2: General operation Construction material: A metal test fixture must be connected to a known protective earth (safety ground) as described in the above WARNING. A nonconductive test fixture must be constructed of materials that are suitable for flammability, voltage, and temperature conditions that may exist in the test circuit. The construction requirements for a nonconductive enclosure are also described in the WARNING above.
PAGE 98
Section 2: General operation Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Figure 38: Floating the Series 2600B schematic The Series 2600B connections for the floating configuration are shown below. In order to float the SMU, input/output LO must be isolated from chassis ground. This is accomplished by not connecting input/output LO to chassis ground. Figure 39: Model 2601B/2602B/2604B/2611B/2612B/2614B SMU connections 2-74 2600BS-901-01 Rev.
PAGE 99
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 2: General operation Figure 40: Models 2634B and 2636B SMU connections (Model 2635B similar) The external voltage source can be a SMU of a second Series 2600B instrument or other instrument. Keep in mind that if the combined outputs of the sources exceeds 42 V, then a safety shield will be required for the DUT (see the following WARNINGS). The maximum floating (common mode) voltage for a SMU is ±250 V.
PAGE 100
Section 2: General operation Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Sense mode selection The sense mode can be set to use 2-wire local sensing connections (on page 2-53) or 4-wire remote sensing connections (on page 2-54). The default sense setting is 2-wire local. Front panel sense mode selection To check or change the sense mode from the front panel: 1. Press the CONFIG key. 2. Press the SRC or MEAS key.
PAGE 101
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 2: General operation Output-off states Carefully consider and configure the appropriate output-off state, source, and compliance limits before connecting the Series 2600B to a device that can deliver energy (for example, other voltage sources, batteries, capacitors, solar cells, or other Series 2600B instruments). Configure recommended instrument settings before making connections to the device.
PAGE 102
Section 2: General operation Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual When the I-Source is the selected source: • • • • The programmed I-Source value remains on the display. Internally, the V-Source is selected and set to 0 V. Current compliance is set to the programmed Source I value or to 10 percent full-scale of the present current range, whichever is greater. Measurements are performed and displayed.
PAGE 103
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 2: General operation When the output-off function is set to either voltage or current, the SMU may source or sink a very small amount of power. In most cases, this source or sink power level is not significant. Selecting the output-off function This setting is used only when the when output is turned off and the source-measure unit (SMU) is in NORMAL output-off mode. To configure the output-off function from the front panel: 1. 2. 3.
PAGE 104
Section 2: General operation Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual To set the current limit in NORMAL output-off mode remotely: smuX.source.offlimiti = iValue To set the voltage limit in NORMAL output-off mode remotely: smuX.source.offlimitv = vValue * smuX: For Models 2601B, 2611B, and 2635B, this value is smua (SMU Channel A); for Models 2602B, 2604B, 2612B, 2614B, 2634B, and 2636B, this value can be smua (for SMU Channel A) or smub (for SMU Channel B).
PAGE 105
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 2: General operation Connecting the USB flash drive The Series 2600B supports flash drives that comply with USB 2.0 standards (as well as USB 1.0 and 1.1 standards). You can save data to the USB flash drive from the front panel, or you can create a script to save data to the USB flash drive. To connect the USB flash drive, plug the USB flash drive into the USB port located on the instrument's front panel (see the figure below).
PAGE 106
Section 2: General operation Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual The following Lua fs commands are not supported at this time: fs.chmod() fs.chown() fs.stat() Displayed error and status messages During operation and programming, front-panel messages may be briefly displayed. Typical messages are either status or error notifications (refer to the Error summary list (on page 8-3) for a complete list of these messages and their meanings).
PAGE 107
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 2: General operation Maximum source values and readings The full-scale output for each voltage and current source range is 101 percent of the selected range, but the full-scale measurement is 102 percent of the range. For example, ±1.01 A is the full-scale source value for the 1 A range, and ±102 mA is the full-scale reading for the 100 mA measurement range.
PAGE 108
Section 2: General operation Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Autoranging To use automatic source ranging, press SRC then the AUTO range key. To use automatic measure ranging, press the MEAS key followed by the AUTO range key. The AUTO indicator turns on when source or measure autoranging is selected. With autoranging selected, the instrument automatically sets the best range to source or measure the applied signal.
PAGE 109
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 2: General operation Range considerations The source range and measure range settings can interact depending on the source function. Additionally, the output state (on/off) can affect how the range is set. The following table describes these interactions: If... Then...
PAGE 110
Section 2: General operation Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Range programming Range commands The following tables summarize commands necessary to control measure and source ranges. See the TSP command reference (on page 7-1) for more details about these commands. Measure range commands* Command** Description smuX.measure.autorangei = smuX.AUTORANGE_ON Enable current measure autorange. smuX.measure.autorangei = smuX.AUTORANGE_OFF smuX.measure.autorangev = smuX.
PAGE 111
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 2: General operation Range programming example The programming example below illustrates how to control both source and measure ranges. The Series 2600B is set up as follows: • • • Voltage source range: Auto Current measure range: 10 mA Voltage source current limit: 10 mA -- Restore Series 2600B defaults. smua.reset() -- Set V source range to auto. smua.source.autorangev = smua.AUTORANGE_ON -- Select 10 mA measure range. smua.measure.
PAGE 112
Section 2: General operation Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Setting display resolution from a remote interface The following table summarizes use of the display.smuX.digits command. See the TSP command reference (on page 7-1) for more information. Digits commands Command* display.smuX.digits = display.DIGITS_4_5 display.smuX.digits = display.DIGITS_5_5 display.smuX.digits = display.DIGITS_6_5 Description Set display to 4.5 digits. Set display to 5.5 digits.
PAGE 113
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 2: General operation The SPEED setting affects all measurement functions. After setting the speed, the display resolution can be changed using the DIGITS key. For the Model 2602B/2604B/2612B/2614B/2634B/2636B in single-channel display mode, pressing the SPEED key for the channel that is not being displayed will result in a display message to change to the other channel before setting the speed.
PAGE 114
Section 2: General operation Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Supported remote interfaces The Series 2600B supports the following remote interfaces: • • GPIB. General purpose interface bus is an IEEE-488 instrumentation data bus. • • USB. Communicate with the instrument over a USB connection. LAN. Local area network (LAN) communications provide the flexibility to build scalable and functional test or data acquisition systems with a large degree of flexibility. RS-232.
PAGE 115
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 2: General operation Figure 42: Series 2600B IEEE-488, LAN, USB, and RS-232 connections 1 IEEE-488 connection 2 LAN connection 3 USB connection 4 RS-232 connection Output queue Response messages, such as those generated from print commands, are placed in the output queue. All remote command interfaces share the same output queue. The output queue sets the message available (MAV) bit in the status model.
PAGE 116
Section 2: General operation Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual USB communications To use the rear-panel USB connection, you must have the Virtual Instrument Software Architecture (VISA) layer on the host computer. See How to install the Keithley I/O Layer (on page 2-102) for more information.
PAGE 117
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 2: General operation Figure 43: Select Operation dialog box 3. Click Next. The Select Communication Bus dialog box is displayed. Figure 44: Select Communication Bus dialog box 4. Select USB. 5. Click Next. The Select Instrument Driver dialog box is displayed. 2600BS-901-01 Rev.
PAGE 118
Section 2: General operation Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Figure 45: Select Instrument Driver dialog box 6. Select Auto-detect Instrument Driver - Model. 7. Click Next. The Configure USB Instrument dialog box is displayed with the detected instrument VISA resource string displayed. 8. Click Next. The Name Virtual Instrument dialog box is displayed. Figure 46: Name Virtual Instrument dialog box 2-94 2600BS-901-01 Rev.
PAGE 119
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. Section 2: General operation In the Virtual Instrument Name box, enter a name that you want to use to refer to the instrument. Click Finish. Click Cancel to close the Wizard. Save the configuration. From the Configuration Utility, select File > Save. In the Keithley Communicator, select File > Open Instrument to open the instrument you just named. Figure 47: Keithley Communicator Open Instrument 14. Click OK. 15.
PAGE 120
Section 2: General operation Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Connecting multiple USB instruments to the computer The most convenient way to connect USB instrumentation to the computer is to plug a USB cable directly from the instrument to the computer. If you have more than one USB instrument or have other USB devices, such as printers, keyboards, and mice, you might not have enough USB connectors on the computer.
PAGE 121
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 2: General operation LAN status LEDs The figure below illustrates the two status light emitting diodes (LED) that are located at the top of the LAN connection port of the instrument. The table below the figure provides explanations of the LED states.
PAGE 122
Section 2: General operation Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Raw socket: Raw socket is a basic ethernet connection that communicates similarly to RS-232 without explicit message boundaries. The instrument will always terminate messages with a line feed, but because binary data may include bytes that resemble line feed characters, it may be difficult to distinguish between data and line feed characters.
PAGE 123
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 2: General operation Instrument driver types There are several different styles of instrument drivers. Keithley Instruments provides three different instrument drivers for the Series 2600B: A native LabVIEW driver, an IVI-C driver, and an IVI-COM driver. You need to pick the style that best suits the application development environment (ADE) that you are using.
PAGE 124
Section 2: General operation Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual LabVIEW drivers Native LabVIEW drivers TM A native LabVIEW driver is a LabVIEW driver that is created using entirely built-in LabVIEW VIs — it does not make any calls to external DLLs or Library files. This makes the driver portable to all the ® platforms and operating systems that LabVIEW and VISA supports (currently, Linux on x86, Mac ® ® ® OS X, and Microsoft Windows ).
PAGE 125
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 2: General operation Interchangeable Virtual Instruments (IVI) style drivers The major problem with VXIPnP drivers was that the API was not specific to the instrument. For something as standard as measuring DC volts on a digital multimeter (DMM), it would be a good idea if there were a set of standard functions to do this. The IVI Foundation (http://www.ivifoundation.
PAGE 126
Section 2: General operation Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual If you already have NI software (such as LabVIEW™ or LabWindows™) installed, you have a valid license that can be used with Keithley drivers and application software. If you do not have NI software installed, you must install the KIOL to install the the drivers. Keithley Configuration Panel The Keithley Configuration Panel is a configuration utility for IVI drivers, similar to NI-MAX.
PAGE 127
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 2: General operation To install the Keithley I/O Layer from the CD-ROM: 1. Close all programs. 2. Place the CD-ROM into your CD-ROM drive. 3. Your web browser should start automatically and display a screen with software installation links. If you need to manually open the web page, use a file explorer to navigate to the CD-ROM drive and open the file named index.html. 4.
PAGE 128
Section 2: General operation Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual GPIB setup This topic contains information about GPIB standards, bus connections, and primary address selection. The Series 2600B GPIB interface is IEEE Std 488.1 compliant and supports IEEE Std 488.2 common commands and status model topology. You can have up to 15 devices connected to a GPIB, including the controller. The maximum cable length is the lesser of either: • • The number of devices multiplied by 6.
PAGE 129
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 2: General operation To connect the instrument to the IEEE-488 bus, line up the cable connector with the connector on the rear panel. Install and tighten the screws securely, making sure not to overtighten them. The following figure shows the location of the connector.Connect any additional connectors from other instruments as required for your application. Make sure the other end of the cable is properly connected to the controller.
PAGE 130
Section 2: General operation Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual General bus commands Command Effect on Series 2600B REN Goes into remote operation when next addressed to listen. See REN (on page 2-106) for details. Goes into talker and listener idle states. See IFC (on page 2-106) for details. LOCAL key locked out. See LLO (on page 2-106) for details. Cancel remote; restore Series 2600B front-panel operation. See GTL (on page 2-106) for details.
PAGE 131
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 2: General operation DCL Use the device clear (DCL) command to clear the GPIB interface and return it to a known state. Note that the DCL command is not an addressed command, so all instruments equipped to implement DCL will do so simultaneously.
PAGE 132
Section 2: General operation Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual GPIB status indicators The remote (REM), talk (TALK), listen (LSTN), and service request (SRQ) indicators show the GPIB bus status. Each of these indicators is described below. REM This indicator is illuminated when the instrument is in the remote control state. When the instrument is in the remote control state, all front-panel keys, except for the EXIT (LOCAL) key, and OUTPUT ON/OFF control, are locked out.
PAGE 133
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 2: General operation Setting RS-232 interface parameters To set interface parameters from the front panel: 1. Press the MENU key, select RS232 and then press the ENTER key or the navigation wheel 2.
PAGE 134
Section 2: General operation Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Terminator When receiving data over the RS-232 interface the command interface terminates on line feeds. A line feed is appended to all output messages when the RS-232 interface is being used as a command interface. Sending data using the serial.write() function does not append a terminator. Be sure to append the appropriate terminator to the message before sending it.
PAGE 135
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 2: General operation RS-232 connections Connect the RS-232 serial port of the Series 2600B to the serial port of a computer using a straightthrough RS-232 cable terminated with DB-9 connectors. Do not use a null modem cable. The serial port uses the transmit (TXD), receive (RXD), CTS and RTS (if flow control is enabled), and signal ground (GND) lines of the RS-232 standard.
PAGE 136
Section 3 Functions and features In this section: Relative offset .......................................................................... 3-1 Filters ....................................................................................... 3-3 Reading buffers ........................................................................ 3-6 Sweep operation .................................................................... 3-20 Triggering .........................................................................
PAGE 137
Section 3: Functions and features Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual To establish a unique relative offset value from the front panel: 1. Press the CONFIG key and then the REL key. 2. Select the measurement function (CURRENT, VOLTAGE, OHMS, or WATTS), and then press ENTER or the navigation wheel . The present relative offset value is displayed. 3. Set the relative offset value. 4.
PAGE 138
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 3: Functions and features Filters The filter feature lets you set the filter response to stabilize noisy measurements. The Series 2600B uses a digital filter, which is based on reading conversions. The displayed, stored, or transmitted reading is calculated using one or more reading conversions (from 1 to 100). Filter types The Series 2600B has three filter types.
PAGE 139
Section 3: Functions and features Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual The moving average filter uses a first-in, first-out stack. When the stack (filter count) becomes full, the measurement conversions are averaged, yielding a reading. For each subsequent conversion placed into the stack, the oldest conversion is discarded. The stack is averaged again, yielding a new reading.
PAGE 140
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 3: Functions and features To configure the filter: 1. Press the CONFIG key and then the FILTER key. 2. Select TYPE, and then select the filter type: AVERAGE or MEDIAN. • AVERAGE: Use this menu item to select an averaging filter, then select the averaging filter type: MOVING or REPEAT. • MEDIAN: Use this menu item to select a median filter. The MOVING filter type is the only option. 1.
PAGE 141
Section 3: Functions and features Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Reading buffers Reading buffers capture measurements, ranges, instrument status, and output state of the Keithley Instruments Series 2600B. The Series 2600B has two default reading buffers called defbuffer1 and defbuffer2. In addition to the default buffers, you can create user-defined reading buffers. You can use the reading buffers to acquire readings.
PAGE 142
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 3: Functions and features Reading buffer options The following listing outlines the menu structure and menu items associated with front panel reading buffer control. This section provides a description for each reading buffer option. Use the procedure in Configuring reading buffers (on page 3-8) as a guideline to configure these reading buffer options. CHANA-BUFF: Configures Channel A buffer.
PAGE 143
Section 3: Functions and features Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Configuring reading buffers To configure reading buffers from the front panel: Enabling or disabling the source value or the timestamp is optional. 1. Press the CONFIG key. 2. Press the STORE key and then choose one of the following: • CHANA-BUFF • CHANB-BUFF (Model 2602B/2604B/2612B/2614B/2634B/2636B only) 1.
PAGE 144
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 3: Functions and features To configure the instrument to append or overwrite measurements the next time data is acquired: 1. Press the CONFIG key. 2. Press the STORE key and then select STORAGE-MODE. The Storage Mode menu is shown. 3. Select one of the following: • APPEND • OVERWRITE 1. Press the EXIT (LOCAL) key to return to the main menu.
PAGE 145
Section 3: Functions and features Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual To save the reading buffer data: 1. From the front panel, press the STORE key, and then select SAVE. 2. Select INTERNAL to save to internal nonvolatile memory. 3. Select one of the following: • SMUA_BUFFER1 • SMUA_BUFFER2 • SMUB_BUFFER1* • SMUB_BUFFER2* * Model 2602B/2604B/2612B/2614B/2634B/2636B only. 1. The front panel displays Saving... This may take awhile. 2.
PAGE 146
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 3: Functions and features Timestamp If the timestamp is enabled, the first source-measure reading stored in the buffer (#0000001) is timestamped at 0.000 seconds. Subsequent readings are timestamped relative to when the first measurement was made. The interval between readings depends on the reading rate. Displaying other buffer readings and statistics To display other readings and statistics in the reading buffer: 1.
PAGE 147
Section 3: Functions and features Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Reading buffer commands The following table summarizes commands associated with the reading buffers. See the TSP command reference (on page 7-1) for detailed reading buffer command information. Reading buffer commands* Command Description Commands to save/clear readings: smuX.savebuffer(smuX.nvbufferY) smuX.nvbuffer1.clear() smuX.nvbuffer2.clear() mybuffer = smuX.makebuffer(n) mybuffer = nil savebuffer(smuX.
PAGE 148
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 3: Functions and features Buffer storage control attributes The following table contains buffer storage control attributes. Before changing the collectsourcevalues, collecttimestamps, or timestampresolution attributes, you must clear the buffer using the smuX.nvbuffer1.clear() or smuX.nvbuffer2.clear() command.
PAGE 149
Section 3: Functions and features Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Buffer read-only attributes The following table contains buffer read-only attributes. Buffer read-only attributes: Read-only attributes used to access buffer parameters Storage attribute basetimestamp capacity n next Description The timestamp of when the reading at rb[1] was stored, in seconds from midnight January 1, 1970 GMT. See Time and date values (on page 7-3) for additional details.
PAGE 150
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 3: Functions and features Statistic attributes Use the smuX.buffer.getstats() function to access the reading buffer data statistics. The table below displays the attributes that you can use to access the reading buffer statistics. The returned parameter has the attributes described in the following table.
PAGE 151
Section 3: Functions and features Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Reading buffer attributes Use the reading buffer attributes to access the reading buffer data. The table below displays the attributes that you can use to access the reading buffer data.
PAGE 152
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 3: Functions and features Buffer status The buffer reading status attribute includes the status information as a numeric value; see the following table for values. For example, to access status information for the second element of SMU channel A buffer 1, use the following command: stat_info = smua.nvbuffer1.
PAGE 153
Section 3: Functions and features Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Buffer examples Dedicated reading buffer example The following programming example illustrates how to store data using dedicated reading buffer 1 for channel A. In the example, the Series 2600B loops for voltages from 0.01 V to 1 V with 0.01 V steps (essentially performing a staircase sweep), stores 100 current readings and source values in buffer 1, and then recalls all 100 readings and source values.
PAGE 154
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 3: Functions and features Dual buffer example The programming example below shows a script for storing both current and voltage readings using buffer 1 for current and buffer 2 for voltage readings. The Series 2600B stores 100 current and voltage readings and then recalls all 100 sets of readings. -- Restore Series 2600B defaults. smua.reset() -- Select measure I autorange. smua.measure.autorangei = smua.
PAGE 155
Section 3: Functions and features Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Dynamically allocated buffer example The programming example below illustrates how to store data to an allocated buffer called mybuffer. The Series 2600B stores 100 current readings in mybuffer and then recalls all the readings. -- Restore Series 2600B defaults. smua.reset() -- Select measure I autorange. smua.measure.autorangei = smua.AUTORANGE_ON -- Select measure V autorange. smua.measure.autorangev = smua.
PAGE 156
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 3: Functions and features Figure 54: Sweep types DC and pulsed linear staircase sweeps (A): With this type of sweep, the voltage or current increases or decreases in fixed steps, beginning with a start voltage or current and ending with a stop voltage or current. This portion of the figure (A) shows an increasing linear staircase sweep and a pulsed staircase sweep.
PAGE 157
Section 3: Functions and features Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Sweep characteristics For any of the sweep types, program a pulse mode sweep by configuring the end pulse action. Refer to Pulse mode sweeps (on page 3-27) for more information. Linear staircase sweeps As shown below, this sweep type steps from a start voltage or current value to an ending (stop) value. When enabled, a measurement is made at each point after the source and measurement settling time.
PAGE 158
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 3: Functions and features The sweep can be either positive-going or negative-going, depending on the relative values of the start and stop parameters. When the sweep starts, the output will go to the start source level. The output will then change in equal steps until the stop level is reached. If the trigger count is greater than the number of points specified, the SMU will start over at the beginning value.
PAGE 159
Section 3: Functions and features Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual The asymptote is used to change the inflection of the sweep curve and allow it to sweep through zero. Both of the following figures depict the effect of the asymptote on the inflection of the sweep curve. The following two figures show sample sweeps. Figure 56: Increasing logarithmic sweep Figure 57: Decreasing logarithmic sweep 3-24 2600BS-901-01 Rev.
PAGE 160
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 3: Functions and features Solving for k and b provides the following formulas: Where: Vend = The source value at the end point Vstart N = The source value at the start point = The number of points in the sweep = The asymptote value A The number of points in a sweep is one greater than the number of steps in the sweep. The following figure is an example of a five-point logarithmic sweep from 1 V to 10 V.
PAGE 161
Section 3: Functions and features Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual In this example: A = 0, Vstart = 1, Vend = 10, N = 5 Using the formula above, k = 1 Step size (b) for the sweep in the above figure is calculated as follows: Figure 59: Logarithmic staircase sweeps (2) – log10(start-0) Log Step Size = log10(stop-0) -----------------------------------------------------------------------------   Points – 1   log10(10) – log10(1)   = ---------------------------------------
PAGE 162
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 3: Functions and features Example: -- Configure a sweep from 1 to 10 V in 10 steps with an asymptote of 0 V. smua.trigger.source.logv(1, 10, 11, 0) -- Enable the source action. smua.trigger.source.action = smua.ENABLE For more information, see smuX.trigger.source.logY() (on page 7-250). List sweeps Use a list sweep to configure a sweep with arbitrary steps.
PAGE 163
Section 3: Functions and features Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Timers must be used to configure the pulse width and period. Refer to Using timers to perform pulse mode sweeps (on page 3-45) for details. The pulse width is managed by controlling the duration between the source stimulus event and the end pulse stimulus event. Note that a latency exists between these stimulus events and their resulting source level transitions.
PAGE 164
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 3: Functions and features Pulsing in the extended operating area (EOA) Pulse sweeps can be performed outside of the standard operating area by setting the appropriate compliance level. Review the specifications for the Series 2600B to determine the maximum current and voltage values available in pulse mode.
PAGE 165
Section 3: Functions and features Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Source and measurement delays Whenever the source-measure unit (SMU) outputs a source value in a sweep, it also applies the programmed source delay. The default source delay is zero (0) seconds. Set an additional source delay using the smuX.source.delay attribute. Whenever the SMU performs a measurement in a sweep, it also applies any configured measurement delays. Use the smuX.measure.
PAGE 166
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 3: Functions and features Sweep programming examples Procedures for programming and running a sweep for three sweep types are given on the following pages. Each of these procedures includes commands for a typical sweep example. The following table summarizes parameters for each of these examples. You can retrieve the source code for the factory scripts by using the scriptVar.list() (on page 7-169) or scriptVar.
PAGE 167
Section 3: Functions and features Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Pulse current sweep example The programming example below illustrates a pulse sweep. -- Restore Series 2600B defaults. smua.reset() -- Set compliance to 10 V. smua.source.limitv = 10 -- Pulse current sweep, 1 mA bias, -- 10 mA level, 10 ms pulse on, -- 50 ms pulse off, 10 cycles. PulseIMeasureV(smua, 1e-3, 10e-3, 20e-3, 50e-3, 10) printbuffer(1, 10, smua.nvbuffer1.readings) 1. Configure source functions.
PAGE 168
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 3: Functions and features You can obtain very precise timing and synchronization between channels of multiple instruments using the trigger model to control the actions of the source-measure unit (SMU). To achieve such precise timing, use a static trigger configuration. When a static trigger configuration is not possible, you can use the interactive triggering method to control the timing and actions of the SMU.
PAGE 169
Section 3: Functions and features Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Trigger events are identified by means of an event ID. The following table describes the trigger event IDs. Trigger event IDs* Event ID** Event description smuX.trigger.SWEEPING_EVENT_ID Occurs when the source-measure unit (SMU) transitions from the idle state to the arm layer of the trigger model Occurs when the SMU moves from the arm layer to the trigger layer of the trigger model smuX.trigger.
PAGE 170
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 3: Functions and features Figure 63: Remote trigger model: Normal (synchronous) mode 2600BS-901-01 Rev.
PAGE 171
Section 3: Functions and features Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Figure 64: Remote trigger model: Asynchronous mode 3-36 2600BS-901-01 Rev.
PAGE 172
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 3: Functions and features When the smuX.trigger.measure.action attribute is set to smuX.DISABLE or smuX.ENABLE, the trigger model will operate in synchronous measurement mode. When it is set to smuX.ASYNC, it will operate in asynchronous mode. Each section of the trigger model performs a function: Idle state: Arm layer: Trigger layer: If a sweep is not in process, the SMU is in the idle state. Use the smuX.trigger.
PAGE 173
Section 3: Functions and features Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual The source-measure unit (SMU) can be configured to perform any or all available measurements during a sweep using the smuX.trigger.measure.Y() function. To enable the measure action for a simple synchronous sweep, set the smuX.trigger.measure.action attribute to smuX.ENABLE. To enable the measure action for an asynchronous sweep, set the smuX.trigger.measure.action attribute to smuX.ASYNC.
PAGE 174
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 3: Functions and features SMU event detectors As shown in the Using the remote trigger model (on page 3-34) topic, the source-measure unit (SMU) has multiple event detectors (see the table below) in order to control the timing of various actions. Each event detector monitors for the trigger event assigned to the associated stimulus input.
PAGE 175
Section 3: Functions and features Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual The programming example below illustrates how to configure a 10-point linear voltage sweep on SMU A, where each step is triggered by the front-panel TRIG key: -- Configure a 10-point source voltage sweep. smua.trigger.source.linearv(10, 100, 10) smua.trigger.source.action = smua.ENABLE -- Configure TRIG key press as input trigger for source action. smua.trigger.source.stimulus = display.trigger.
PAGE 176
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 3: Functions and features Figure 66: Using trigger events to start actions A stimulus input can be configured to monitor for only one trigger event ID at a time. To monitor more than one event, use an event blender. See Event blenders (on page 3-49) for more information. Action overruns An action overrun occurs when a trigger object receives a trigger event and is not ready to act on it.
PAGE 177
Section 3: Functions and features Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual To disable triggering on the hardware trigger lines, set the mode to bypass. This allows direct control of the line.
PAGE 178
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 3: Functions and features Figure 67: External instrument triggering Action overruns on hardware lines ® An action overrun occurs when a trigger event is received before the digital I/O or TSP-Link line is ready to process it. The generation of an action overrun is dependent upon the trigger mode selected for that line. For more details on the causes of action overruns, see Hardware trigger modes (on page 3-57).
PAGE 179
Section 3: Functions and features Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Timer delays Timers can be configured to perform the same delay each time or configured with a delay list that allows the timer to sequence through an array of delay values. All delay values are specified in seconds. A delay is the period of time after the timer is triggered and before the timer generates a trigger event.
PAGE 180
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 3: Functions and features Figure 68: Using a timer for an SDM cycle Timer action overruns The timer generates an action overrun when it generates a trigger event while a timer delay is still in progress. Use the status model to monitor for the occurrence of action overruns (for details, see the Status model (on page 5-14, on page E-1)).
PAGE 181
Section 3: Functions and features Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual The following figure shows the trigger setup for this example. Figure 69: Single pulse triggering Single pulse example code -- Generate a single 500 us, 5 V pulse. -- Configure a single-point voltage list sweep. smua.trigger.source.listv({5}) smua.trigger.source.action = smua.ENABLE smua.trigger.measure.action = smua.DISABLE -- Configure other source parameters for best timing possible. smua.trigger.source.
PAGE 182
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 3: Functions and features Pulse train example: The programming example below illustrates how to use two timers: One to control the pulse period, a second to control the pulse width. The example configures the timers and SMU as follows: Timer 1: Pulse period timer • • • • Set the delay attribute to the appropriate pulse period (see the following figure). Configure the timer to start when the sweep is initiated.
PAGE 183
Section 3: Functions and features Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual The following figure shows the trigger setup for this example. Figure 71: Pulse train triggering 3-48 2600BS-901-01 Rev.
PAGE 184
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 3: Functions and features Pulse train example code -- Generate a 10-point pulse train where each pulse has a width of 600 -- microseconds and a pulse period of 5 milliseconds. -- Alias the trigger timers to use for pulse width and period. period_timer = trigger.timer[1] pulse_timer = trigger.timer[2] -- Create a fixed level voltage sweep. smua.trigger.source.listv({5}) smua.trigger.source.action = smua.ENABLE smua.source.rangev = 5 smua.
PAGE 185
Section 3: Functions and features Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Event blender modes Event blenders can be used to perform logical AND and logical OR functions on trigger events. For example, trigger events can be triggered when either a manual trigger or external input trigger is detected.
PAGE 186
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 3: Functions and features Understanding hardware value and pseudo line state LAN triggering is similar to hardware synchronization except that LXI trigger packets are used instead of hardware signals. A bit in the LXI trigger packet called the hardware value simulates the state of a hardware trigger line. The Series 2600B stores the hardware value of the last LXI trigger packet that was sent or received as the pseudo line state.
PAGE 187
Section 3: Functions and features Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual The programming example below illustrates how to configure the LAN trigger mode. -- Set LAN trigger 2 to have falling-edge mode. lan.trigger[2].mode = lan.TRIG_FALLING Understanding LXI trigger event designations LAN trigger objects generate LXI trigger events, which are LAN0 to LAN7 (zero based). In the command table, the LXI trigger events can be accessed using lan.trigger[1] through lan.trigger[8]. lan.
PAGE 188
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 3: Functions and features The command queue can fill up with trigger entries if too many *TRG messages are received while a test script is running, even if the script is processing triggers. You can avoid this by using the localnode.prompts4882 attribute (see TSP command reference (on page 7-1) for more information), and by using trigger.wait() calls that remove the *TRG messages from the command queue.
PAGE 189
Section 3: Functions and features Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Detecting trigger events using the wait() function All of the Series 2600B trigger objects (except for SMUs) have built-in event detectors that monitor for trigger events. The event detector only monitors events generated by that object and cannot be configured to monitor events generated by any other trigger object.
PAGE 190
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 3: Functions and features Using the release function of the hardware lines Use the release function to allow the hardware line to output another external trigger when the pulse width is set to 0. Setting the pulse width to 0 results in an indefinite length pulse when the assert function is used to output an external trigger.
PAGE 191
Section 3: Functions and features Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Detector overruns are not the same as action overruns that are reported in the status model. The programming example below illustrates how to check and respond to detector overruns. testOver = digio.trigger[4].overrun if testOver == true then print("Digital I/O overrun occurred.
PAGE 192
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 3: Functions and features -- Configure digital I/O lines 2 and 14 for input trigger detection -- and output trigger generation, respectively. digio.trigger[2].mode = digio.TRIG_RISINGA digio.trigger[2].clear() digio.trigger[14].mode = digio.TRIG_FALLING digio.trigger[14].pulsewidth = 0.0001 -- Wait 15 seconds for a trigger event to occur on digital I/O line 2. trigInput = digio.trigger[2].
PAGE 193
Section 3: Functions and features Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Figure 72: Falling edge input trigger Output characteristics: • In addition to trigger events from other trigger objects, the digio.trigger[N].assert() and tsplink.trigger[N].assert() commands generate a low pulse for the programmed pulse duration. • An action overrun occurs if the physical line state is low and a source event occurs.
PAGE 194
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 3: Functions and features Output characteristics: • Configured trigger events, as well as the digio.trigger[N].assert() and tsplink.trigger[N].assert() commands, cause the physical line state to float high during the trigger pulse duration. • An action overrun occurs if the physical line state is high while a stimulus event occurs.
PAGE 195
Section 3: Functions and features Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Output characteristics: • In addition to trigger events from other trigger objects, the digio.trigger[N].assert() and tsplink.trigger[N].assert() commands generate a low pulse that is similar to the falling edge trigger mode. Figure 76: RisingA output trigger Either edge trigger mode The either edge trigger mode generates a low pulse and detects both rising and falling edges.
PAGE 196
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 3: Functions and features Output characteristics: • In addition to trigger events from other trigger objects, the digio.trigger[N].assert() and tsplink.trigger[N].assert() commands generate a low pulse that is similar to the falling edge trigger mode. • An action overrun occurs if the physical line state is low while a stimulus event occurs.
PAGE 197
Section 3: Functions and features Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Input characteristics: • • • All rising edges are input triggers. When all external drives release the physical line, the rising edge is detected as an input trigger. A rising edge is not detected until all external drives release the line and the line floats high. Figure 79: SynchronousM input trigger Output characteristics: • In addition to trigger events from other trigger objects, the digio.trigger[N].
PAGE 198
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 3: Functions and features Synchronous acceptor trigger mode (SynchronousA) Use the synchronous acceptor trigger mode (SynchronousA) in conjunction with the SynchronousM trigger mode. The roles of the internal and external drives are reversed in the SynchronousA trigger mode. Input characteristics: • The falling edge is detected as the external drive pulses the line low, and the internal drive latches the line low.
PAGE 199
Section 3: Functions and features Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Synchronous trigger mode The synchronous trigger mode is a combination of SynchronousA and SynchronousM trigger modes. Use the Synchronous trigger mode for compatibility with older Keithley Instruments products. Keithley Instruments recommends using SynchronousA and SynchronousM modes only. Input characteristics: • The falling edge generates an input event and latches the internal drive low.
PAGE 200
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 3: Functions and features Figure 84: Synchronous output trigger High-capacitance mode Overview ® The Keithley Instruments Series 2600B System SourceMeter instrument has a high-capacitance mode. Because the source-measure unit (SMU) has the ability to measure low current, issues can arise when driving a capacitive load.
PAGE 201
Section 3: Functions and features Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual When high-capacitance mode is enabled, a minimum load capacitance of 100 nF is recommended. In absence of this minimum load capacitance, overshoot and ringing may occur. Highest throughput is achieved by using normal operation. In high-capacitance mode, the speed of the Series 2600B SMU is reduced to compensate for the larger load capacitance.
PAGE 202
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 3: Functions and features Understanding source settling times Each Series 2600B source-measure unit (SMU) can drive up to 50 µF of a capacitance in high-capacitance mode. In order to accomplish this, the speed of the Series 2600B SMU is reduced. Source settling times increase when high-capacitance mode is enabled. The following tables compare the source settling times in normal and high-capacitance modes.
PAGE 203
Section 3: Functions and features Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Adjusting the voltage source When driving large capacitive loads with high-capacitance mode enabled, the response time may be lengthened by the current limit. For example, see the table titled "Current measure and source settling times" in the Understanding source settling times (on page 3-67) topic.
PAGE 204
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 3: Functions and features Front panel To enable high-capacitance mode from the front panel: 1. Press the CONFIG key. 2. Press the SRC key and then select HIGHC-MODE. 3. Select SRC-ENABLE and then press the navigation wheel (or the ENTER key). 4. Select ENABLE and then press the navigation wheel (or the ENTER key). 5. Press the EXIT (LOCAL) key to back out of the menu structure.
PAGE 205
Section 3: Functions and features Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual 2. To run the i_leakage_measure() function in the KIHighC factory script, send: -- Charges the capacitor. smua.source.levelv = 5 smua.source.output = smua.
PAGE 206
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 3: Functions and features Display operations Display functions and attributes The display functions and attributes are used to perform the display operations covered in this section. The following table lists each display function/attribute (in alphabetical order) and cross references it to the section topic where the function/attribute is explained.
PAGE 207
Section 3: Functions and features Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Display screen ® Keithley Instruments Series 2600B System SourceMeter instrument displays source-measure values and readings or user defined messages. The display screen options include the following: • Source-measure, compliance screens: Display SMU source-measure readings and compliance values. • User screen: Display user-defined messages and prompts.
PAGE 208
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 3: Functions and features For example, while a test is running, the following message can be displayed on the Series 2600B: Test in Process Do Not Disturb The top line of the display can accommodate up to 20 characters (including spaces). The bottom line can display up to 32 characters (including spaces) at a time. The display.clear(), display.setcursor(), and display.
PAGE 209
Section 3: Functions and features Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual The function to set cursor position can be used two ways: display.setcursor(row, column) display.setcursor(row, column, style) Where: row 1 or 2 column 1 to 20 (row 1) 1 to 32 (row 2) 0 (invisible) 1 (blink) style When set to 0, the cursor will not be seen. When set to 1, a display character will blink to indicate its position. The display.
PAGE 210
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 3: Functions and features Character codes The following special codes can be embedded in the text string to configure and customize the message: $N Starts text on the next line (newline). If the cursor is already on line 2, text will be ignored after the ‘$N’ is received. $R Sets text to Normal. $B Sets text to Blink. $D Sets text to Dim intensity. $F Set text to background blink. $$ Escape sequence to display a single “$”.
PAGE 211
Section 3: Functions and features Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Returning a text message The display.gettext() function returns the displayed message (text) and can be used in five ways: text text text text text = = = = = display.gettext() display.gettext(embellished) display.gettext(embellished, row) display.gettext(embellished, row, columnStart) display.
PAGE 212
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 3: Functions and features The following programming example illustrates how to present the operator with the choice of two menu items: Test1 or Test2. If Test1 is selected, the message Running Test1 is displayed. If Test2 is selected, the message Running Test2 is displayed. display.clear() menu = display.menu("Sample Menu", "Test1 Test2") if menu == "Test1" then display.settext("Running Test1") else display.
PAGE 213
Section 3: Functions and features Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Both the display.inputvalue() and display.prompt() functions display the editable input field, but the display.inputvalue() function does not include the text strings for units and help. After one of the above functions is executed, command execution will pause and wait for the operator in input the source level.
PAGE 214
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 3: Functions and features Bit identification for indicators Bit B16 B15 B14 B13 B12 B11 B10 B9 Annunciator REL REAR SRQ LSTN TALK REM ERR EDIT Weighted value* Binary value 32768 0/1 16384 0/1 8192 0/1 4096 0/1 2048 0/1 1024 0/1 512 0/1 256 0/1 Bit B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 Annunciator SMPL STAR TRIG ARM AUTO 4W MATH FILT 2 0/1 1 0/1 Weighted value* 128 64 32 16 8 4 Binary value 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1
PAGE 215
Section 3: Functions and features Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Adding USER TESTS menu entries You can use the following function in either of two ways to add an entry into the USER TESTS menu: display.loadmenu.add(displayname, code) display.loadmenu.add(displayname, code, memory) Where: displayname The name string that is added to the USER TESTS menu. code The code that is run from the USER TESTS menu when the RUN button is pressed. It can include any valid Lua code.
PAGE 216
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 3: Functions and features The following programming example removes the entry named “Part1” from the front-panel USER TESTS menu: display.loadmenu.delete("Part1") Running a test from the front panel To run a user, factory, or script test from the front panel: 1. Press the LOAD key to display the LOAD TEST menu. 2. Select the USER, FACTORY, or SCRIPTS menu item. 3.
PAGE 217
Section 3: Functions and features Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual display.getlastkey() The display.getlastkey() function is used to immediately return the key code for the last pressed key. The following programming example illustrates how to display the last key pressed: key = display.getlastkey() print(key) The above code will return the key code value (see the following table). Remember that a value of 0 (display.
PAGE 218
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 3: Functions and features The following programming example illustrates how to prompt the user to press the EXIT (LOCAL) key to abort the script, or any other key to continue it: display.clear() display.setcursor(1, 1) display.settext("Press EXIT to Abort") display.setcursor(2, 1) display.settext("or any key to continue") key = display.waitkey() display.clear() display.setcursor(1, 1) if key == 75 then display.
PAGE 219
Section 3: Functions and features Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual For a schematic diagram of the digital I/O hardware, refer to the Series 2600B Specifications on the Keithley Instruments support website (http://www.keithley.com/support).
PAGE 220
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 3: Functions and features Digital I/O configuration The following figure shows the basic configuration of the digital I/O port. Writing a 1 to a line sets that line high (~ +5 V). Writing a 0 to a line sets that line low (~0 V). Note that an external device pulls an I/O line low by shorting it to ground, so that a device must be able to sink at least 960 µA per I/O line.
PAGE 221
Section 3: Functions and features Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual To write-protect specific digital I/O lines to prevent their values from being changed: 1. Press the MENU key, then select , and then press the ENTER key or the navigation wheel . 2. Select WRITE-PROTECT, and then press the ENTER key or the navigation wheel . 3.
PAGE 222
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 3: Functions and features Remote digital I/O commands Command digio.readbit(bit) digio.readport() digio.writebit(bit, data) digio.writeport(data) digio.
PAGE 223
Section 3: Functions and features Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Figure 89: Using the output enable line Front-panel control of output enable To activate the output enable line: 1. Press the CONFIG key followed by the OUTPUT ON/OFF control. 2. Choose DIO-CONTROL, then press the ENTER key or the navigation wheel . 3.
PAGE 224
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 3: Functions and features Interlock The interlock is available on the Models 2611B/2612B/2614B/2634B/2635B/2636B only. The interlock circuit must be positively activated in order for the high voltage output to be enabled. The interlock helps facilitate safe operation of the equipment in a test system. Bypassing the interlock could expose the operator to hazardous voltages that could result in personal injury or death.
PAGE 225
Section 3: Functions and features Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual TSP-Link synchronization lines The Series 2600B has three synchronization lines that you can use for triggering, digital I/O, and to ® synchronize multiple instruments on a TSP-Link network. ® The Models 2604B, 2614B, and 2634B do not have a TSP-Link interface. Connecting to the TSP-Link system ® The TSP-Link synchronization lines are built into the TSP-Link connection.
PAGE 226
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 3: Functions and features Programming example The programming example below illustrates how to set bit B1 of the TSP-Link digital I/O port high, and then read the entire port value: tsplink.trigger[1].mode = tsplink.TRIG_BYPASS -- Set bit B1 high. tsplink.writebit(1, 1) -- Read I/O port. data = tsplink.readport() 2600BS-901-01 Rev.
PAGE 227
Section 4 Theory of operation In this section: Analog-to-digital converter ....................................................... 4-1 Source-measure concepts ....................................................... 4-1 Measurement settling time considerations ............................. 4-25 Effects of load on current source settling time........................ 4-26 Creating pulses with the Series 2600B ..................................
PAGE 228
Section 4: Theory of operation Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Compliance limit principles ® A limit acts as a clamp. If the output reaches the limit value, the System SourceMeter instrument attempts to prevent the output from exceeding that value. This action implies that the source will switch from a V-source to an I-source (or from an I-source to a V-source) when a limit is reached.
PAGE 229
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 4: Theory of operation However, if any one of these is false, the instrument may overheat if operated in a manner that exceeds the calculated maximum duty cycle, DCMAX. The maximum duty cycle equation is derived from the power equation below by solving for DCMAX.
PAGE 230
Section 4: Theory of operation Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual When attempting to determine the maximum duty cycle, where the off state will be 0 V or 0 A:  IB is 0 IP and VP are the voltage and current levels when the instrument is on Model 2601B/2602B/2604B maximum duty cycle equation constants Constant 100 mV range 1 V range 6 V range 40 V range VOA 18 18 18 55 Model 2611B/2612B/2614B/2634B/2635B/2636B maximum duty cycle equation constants Constant 200 mV rang
PAGE 231
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 4: Theory of operation Continuous power operating boundaries The general operating boundaries for Model 2601B/2602B/2604B continuous power output are shown in the following figure (for derating factors, see the General power equation (on page 4-3) described earlier in this section). In this drawing, the current (600 mA, 1 A, 2.2 A, and 3 A) and the voltage (6 V and 40 V) magnitudes are nominal values.
PAGE 232
Section 4: Theory of operation Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Operation as a sink When operating the Series 2600B in the second or fourth quadrant, the SMU operates as a load that sinks and dissipates the power internally. The SMU’s ability to dissipate power is defined by the boundaries shown in the previous figure. When operating the Series 2600B in the second or fourth quadrant, the DUT would be a power source (such as a battery, solar cell, or a power supply).
PAGE 233
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 4: Theory of operation The first graph in the figure (marked "A: Output characteristics") shows the output characteristics for the V-source. As shown, the Models 2601B, 2602B, and 2604B can output up to 6.06 V at 3 A, or 40.4 V at 1 A. Note that when sourcing more than 6.06 V, current is limited to 1 A. The second graph in the figure (marked "B: Limit lines") shows the limit lines for the V-source.
PAGE 234
Section 4: Theory of operation Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual The first graph in the figure (marked "A: Output characteristics") shows the output characteristics for the V-source. As shown, the Models 2611B/2612B/2614B/2634B/2635B/2636B can output up to 20.2 V at 1.5 A, or 202 V at 100 mA. Note that when sourcing more than 20.2 V, current is limited to 100 mA. The second graph in the figure (marked "B: Limit lines") shows the limit lines for the V-source.
PAGE 235
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 4: Theory of operation Figure 94: Series 2600B V-source load considerations 2600BS-901-01 Rev.
PAGE 236
Section 4: Theory of operation Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual The following figure shows a voltage sweep on a resistive load of 800 Ω. For this example, the System SourceMeter instrument is programmed to sweep voltage to 10 V, limit current (6 mA) and limit power (50 mW). When sweeping, the actual source output will vary according to the programmed source value until the current limit is reached.
PAGE 237
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 4: Theory of operation The current compliance limit applies both to positive and negative currents. For example, if you set the current compliance limit to 50 mA, the current limit applies to ±50 mA. For this example, the Series 2600B is programmed to source 2 V and to limit current to 50 mA. When the SMU turns on, the battery voltage is higher than the programmed voltage source value.
PAGE 238
Section 4: Theory of operation Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual I-source operating boundaries Models 2601B/2602B/2604B I-source operating boundaries The following figure shows the operating boundaries for the I-source. Only the first quadrant of operation is shown; operation in the other three quadrants is similar. The first graph in the figure (marked "A: Output characteristics") shows the output characteristics for the I-source.
PAGE 239
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 4: Theory of operation Models 2611B/2612B/2614B/2634B/2635B/2636B I-source operating boundaries The following figure shows the operating boundaries for the I-source. Only the first quadrant of operation is shown; operation in the other three quadrants is similar. The first graph in the figure (marked "A: Output characteristics") shows the output characteristics for ® the I-source.
PAGE 240
Section 4: Theory of operation Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Load considerations (I-source) ® The boundaries within which the System SourceMeter instrument operates depend on the load (device-under-test (DUT)) that is connected to its output. The following figure shows operation examples for resistive loads that are 50 Ω and 200 Ω, respectively. For these examples, the System SourceMeter instrument is programmed to source 100 mA and limit voltage (10 V).
PAGE 241
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 4: Theory of operation Figure 98: Series 2600B I-source load considerations 2600BS-901-01 Rev.
PAGE 242
Section 4: Theory of operation Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual The following figure shows a current sweep on a resistive load of 200 Ω. For this example, the System SourceMeter instrument is programmed to sweep current to 100 mA, limit voltage (6 V) and limit power (500 mW). When sweeping, the actual source output will vary according to the programmed source value until the voltage limit is reached.
PAGE 243
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 4: Theory of operation I-source sink operating boundaries The quadrant within which the Series 2600B operates depends on the device-under-test (DUT) connected to the Series 2600B output. The following example illustrates this operation by using the Series 2600B configured to provide a constant current to discharge a 12 V power source (a battery).
PAGE 244
Section 4: Theory of operation Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Make sure to take into account that reversing the polarity may destroy some power sources. To prevent a negative charge, monitor the SMU’s measurement of the battery voltage and stop the discharge before the the Series 2600B starts to operate in quadrant III (negative voltage). You can stop the discharge by changing the programmed current source level or by disconnecting the SMU from the device.
PAGE 245
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 4: Theory of operation Basic circuit configurations Source V When configured to source voltage (V-source) as shown in the figure below, the System ® SourceMeter instrument functions as a low-impedance voltage source with current limit capability, and can measure current (I-meter) or voltage (V-meter). Sense circuitry is used to monitor the output voltage continuously and make adjustments to the Vsource as needed.
PAGE 246
Section 4: Theory of operation Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Source I When the instrument is configured to source current (I-source), as shown in the figure below, the instrument functions as a high-impedance current source with voltage limit capability and can measure current (I-meter) or voltage (V-meter). For 2-wire local sensing, voltage is measured at the HI / LO terminals of the instrument.
PAGE 247
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 4: Theory of operation Measure only (voltage or current) The figures below show the configurations for using the instrument exclusively as a voltmeter or ammeter. As shown in the following figure, to configure the instrument to measure voltage only, set it to source 0 A and measure voltage. Figure 104: Series 2600B measure voltage only 1 2 3 Current source (0.
PAGE 248
Section 4: Theory of operation Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual 1 Voltage source (000.000 mV) 2 3 4 Ammeter Positive current; current flowing out of HI results in positive measurements DUT (current source) Contact check The Models 2604B, 2614B, and 2634B do not perform contact check measurements. When a contact check measurement is being performed, two small current sources are switched in between the HI and SENSE HI terminals and the LO and SENSE LO terminals.
PAGE 249
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 4: Theory of operation Guard GUARD is at the same potential as output HI. Thus, if hazardous voltages are present at output HI, they are also present at the GUARD terminal. Guard overview The driven guard (available at the rear panel GUARD terminals) is always enabled and provides a buffered voltage that is at the same level as the HI (or SENSE HI for remote sense) voltage.
PAGE 250
Section 4: Theory of operation Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Inside the test fixture, a triaxial cable can be used to extend guard to the device under test (DUT). The center conductor of the cable is used for HI, and the inner shield is used for guard. The figures below show how cable guard can eliminate leakage current through the insulators in a test fixture.
PAGE 251
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 4: Theory of operation Measurement settling time considerations Several outside factors can influence measurement settling times. Effects such as dielectric absorption, cable leakages, and noise can all extend the times required to make stable measurements. Be sure to use appropriate shielding, guarding, and aperture selections when making low-current measurements.
PAGE 252
Section 4: Theory of operation Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual For controlling settling time delay The following code provides measure delay examples for controlling settling time delay of SMU Channel A: -- To turn off measure delay (default setting is smua.DELAY_AUTO). smua.measure.delay = 0 -- set measure delay for all ranges to Y (in seconds). smua.measure.delay = Y -- To adjust the delay factor. smua.measure.delayfactor = 1.
PAGE 253
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 4: Theory of operation There is a maximum DUT impedance for each current source range for which the specified current settling times are maintained. The following table lists the DUT impedances for each of these current source ranges. For latest specifications, go to the Keithley Instruments website (http://www.keithley.com).
PAGE 254
Section 4: Theory of operation Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Figure 109: Pulse rise and fall times Range and pulse settling Each range has different specifications for source settling times. This causes different rise and fall time characteristics depending on the set range. In addition, pulse performance is dependent on the pulse setting as a percent of full scale.
PAGE 255
Section 5 Introduction to TSP operation In this section: Introduction to TSP operation................................................... 5-1 About TSP commands ............................................................. 5-3 Factory scripts ........................................................................
PAGE 256
Section 5: Introduction to TSP operation Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Example 2 You can use the results of a function-based command directly or assign variables to the results for later access. The following code defines x and prints it. Output: 100 x = math.abs(-100) print(x) Attributes Attribute-based commands are commands that set the characteristics of an instrument feature or operation.
PAGE 257
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 5: Introduction to TSP operation Information on scripting and programming If you need information about using scripts with your TSP-enabled instrument, see Fundamentals of scripting for TSP (on page 6-1). If you need information about using the Lua programming language with the instrument, see Fundamentals of programming for TSP (on page 6-11). About TSP commands This section contains an overview of the TSP commands for the instrument.
PAGE 258
Section 5: Introduction to TSP operation Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual The Test Script Processor (TSP) scripting engine stores all numbers internally as IEEE Std 754 double-precision floating point values. The logical operations work on 32-bit integers. Any fractional bits are truncated. For numbers larger than 4294967295, only the lower 32 bits are used. bit.bitand() (on page 7-8) bit.bitor() (on page 7-8) bit.bitxor() (on page 7-9) bit.clear() (on page 7-10) bit.
PAGE 259
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 5: Introduction to TSP operation Digital I/O The Models 2604B, 2614B, and 2634B do not have digital input/output lines. The commands to control the digital input/output lines are not available for these models. The digital I/O port of the instrument can control external circuitry (such as a component handler for binning operations). The I/O port has 14 lines. Each line can be at TTL logic state 1 (high) or 0 (low).
PAGE 260
Section 5: Introduction to TSP operation Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Error queue When errors and events occur, the error and status messages are placed in the error queue. Use the error queue commands to request error and status message information. errorqueue.clear() (on page 7-82) errorqueue.count (on page 7-83) errorqueue.next() (on page 7-83) Event log You can use the event log to view specific details about LAN triggering events. eventlog.
PAGE 261
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 5: Introduction to TSP operation ® File descriptors cannot be passed between nodes in a TSP-Link system, so the io.open(), fileVar::read(), and fileVar::write commands are not accessible to the TSP-Link system. However, the default input and output files mentioned above allow for the execution of many file I/O operations without any reference to a file descriptor.
PAGE 262
Section 5: Introduction to TSP operation Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual LAN and LXI The LAN commands have options that allow you to review and configure network settings. The lan.config.* commands allow you to configure LAN settings over the remote interface. Note that you must send lan.applysettings() for the configuration settings to take effect. The lan.status.* commands help you determine the status of the LAN. The lan.trigger[N].
PAGE 263
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 5: Introduction to TSP operation localnode.passwordmode (on page 7-141) Miscellaneous delay() (on page 7-49) exit() (on page 7-88) localnode.autolinefreq (on page 7-137) localnode.linefreq (on page 7-139) localnode.password (on page 7-140) localnode.
PAGE 264
Section 5: Introduction to TSP operation Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Reading buffer Reading buffers capture measurements, ranges, instrument status, and output states of the instrument. bufferVar.appendmode (on page 7-15) bufferVar.basetimestamp (on page 7-15) bufferVar.cachemode (on page 7-16) bufferVar.capacity (on page 7-17) bufferVar.clear() (on page 7-18) bufferVar.clearcache() (on page 7-18) bufferVar.collectsourcevalues (on page 7-19) bufferVar.
PAGE 265
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 5: Introduction to TSP operation Saved setups Use the saved setups commands to save and restore the configuration of the instrument. You can save or restore configurations to or from the instrument's nonvolatile memory or an installed USB flash drive. You can use the setup.poweron attribute to specify which setup is recalled when the instrument is turned on. setup.poweron (on page 7-179) setup.recall() (on page 7-180) setup.
PAGE 266
Section 5: Introduction to TSP operation Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual SMU localnode.linefreq (on page 7-139) localnode.autolinefreq (on page 7-137) smuX.abort() (on page 7-181) smuX.buffer.getstats() (on page 7-182) smuX.buffer.recalculatestats() (on page 7-183) smuX.contact.check() (on page 7-193) smuX.contact.r() (on page 7-194) smuX.contact.speed (on page 7-195) smuX.contact.threshold (on page 7-196) smuX.makebuffer() (on page 7-197) smuX.measure.
PAGE 267
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 5: Introduction to TSP operation smuX.trigger.IDLE_EVENT_ID (on page 7-239) smuX.trigger.initiate() (on page 7-240) smuX.trigger.measure.action (on page 7-241) smuX.trigger.measure.set() (on page 7-241) smuX.trigger.measure.stimulus (on page 7-242) smuX.trigger.measure.Y() (on page 7-244) smuX.trigger.MEASURE_COMPLETE_EVENT_ID (on page 7-244) smuX.trigger.PULSE_COMPLETE_EVENT_ID (on page 7-245) smuX.trigger.source.
PAGE 268
Section 5: Introduction to TSP operation Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Status model The status model is a set of status registers and queues. You can use the following commands to manipulate and monitor these registers and queues to view and control various instrument events. status.condition (on page 7-254) status.measurement.* (on page 7-256) status.measurement.buffer_available.* (on page 7-258) status.measurement.current_limit.* (on page 7-259) status.measurement.
PAGE 269
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 5: Introduction to TSP operation Time bufferVar.basetimestamp (on page 7-15) bufferVar.collecttimestamps (on page 7-20) bufferVar.timestampresolution (on page 7-31) delay() (on page 7-49) gettimezone() (on page 7-98) os.time() (on page 7-151) settime() (on page 7-177) settimezone() (on page 7-178) timer.measure.t() (on page 7-335) timer.reset() (on page 7-336) 2600BS-901-01 Rev.
PAGE 270
Section 5: Introduction to TSP operation Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Triggering The triggering commands allow you to set the conditions that the instrument uses to determine when measurements are captured. See Sweep operation (on page 3-20) for details on sweeping. The digio and tsplink commands are not available on the Models 2604B, 2614B, and 2634B digio.trigger[N].assert() (on page 7-51) digio.trigger[N].clear() (on page 7-51) digio.trigger[N].
PAGE 271
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 5: Introduction to TSP operation smuX.trigger.source.set() (on page 7-251) smuX.trigger.source.stimulus (on page 7-251) smuX.trigger.SOURCE_COMPLETE_EVENT_ID (on page 7-253) smuX.trigger.SWEEP_COMPLETE_EVENT_ID (on page 7-253) smuX.trigger.SWEEPING_EVENT_ID (on page 7-253) trigger.blender[N].clear() (on page 7-336) trigger.blender[N].EVENT_ID (on page 7-337) trigger.blender[N].orenable (on page 7-337) trigger.blender[N].
PAGE 272
Section 5: Introduction to TSP operation Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual TSP-Link These functions and attributes allow you to set up and work with a system that is connected by a ® TSP-Link network. ® The TSP-Link is not available on the Models 2604B, 2614B, and 2634B. These commands are not available on those models. tsplink.group (on page 7-351) tsplink.master (on page 7-352) tsplink.node (on page 7-352) tsplink.readbit() (on page 7-353) tsplink.
PAGE 273
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 5: Introduction to TSP operation Userstrings Use the functions in this group to store and retrieve user-defined strings in nonvolatile memory. These strings are stored as key-value pairs. The key is a unique identifier such as a part number or identification string.
PAGE 274
Section 5: Introduction to TSP operation Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Example: Run the factory script named “KIPulse” script.factory.scripts.KIPulse() Running a factory script function from the Series 2600B front panel controls 1. Press the LOAD key. 2. Select FACTORY. 3. Select the function to run and press the ENTER key or navigation wheel 4. Press the RUN key. 5. Follow the prompts on the front panel to run the script. .
PAGE 275
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 5: Introduction to TSP operation KIPulse factory script The KIPulse factory script provides examples of how to generate pulses and to provide a simple pulsing interface. Pulses can be generated using the functions listed below.
PAGE 276
Section 5: Introduction to TSP operation Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual KIPulse tag parameter pulse functions ConfigPulseIMeasureV() (on page 7-33) ConfigPulseIMeasureVSweepLin() (on page 7-35) ConfigPulseIMeasureVSweepLog() (on page 7-37) ConfigPulseVMeasureISweepLin() (on page 7-41) ConfigPulseVMeasureI() (on page 7-39) ConfigPulseVMeasureISweepLog() (on page 7-43) InitiatePulseTest() (on page 7-103) InitiatePulseTestDual() (on page 7-104) QueryPulseConfig() (on page 7-158)
PAGE 277
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 5: Introduction to TSP operation KISavebuffer factory script The KISavebuffer script has one function: savebuffer(). savebuffer() (on page 7-161) 2600BS-901-01 Rev.
PAGE 278
Section 6 Instrument programming In this section: Fundamentals of scripting for TSP ........................................... 6-1 Fundamentals of programming for TSP ................................. 6-11 Test Script Builder (TSB)........................................................ 6-30 Password management ......................................................... 6-34 Working with TSB Embedded ................................................ 6-37 Advanced scripting for TSP ............................
PAGE 279
Section 6: Instrument programming Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual What is a script? A script is a collection of instrument control commands and programming statements. Scripts that you create are referred to as user scripts. Your scripts can be interactive. Interactive scripts display messages on the front panel of the instrument that prompt the operator to enter parameters.
PAGE 280
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 6: Instrument programming Commands that cannot be used in scripts Though an instrument accepts the following commands, you cannot use these commands in scripts. Commands that cannot be used in scripts General commands abort endflash endscript flash loadscript loadandrunscript password restoreglobals IEEE Std 488.
PAGE 281
Section 6: Instrument programming Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Named scripts A named script is a script with a unique name. You can have as many named scripts as needed in the instrument (within the limits of the memory available to the run-time environment). When a named script is loaded into the run-time environment with the loadscript or loadandrunscript commands, a global variable with the same name is created to reference the script.
PAGE 282
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 6: Instrument programming To load a named script by sending commands: 1. Send the command loadscript scriptName, where scriptName is the name of the script. The name must be a legal Lua variable name. 2. Send the commands that need to be included in the script. 3. Send the command endscript. 4. You can now run the script. See Run scripts (on page 6-5).
PAGE 283
Section 6: Instrument programming Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Run a named script You can run any named script that is in the run-time environment using one of the following commands: • • scriptVar() scriptVar.run() Where: scriptVar is the user-defined name of the script. To run a named script from TSB Embedded, select the script from the User Scripts list and click Run. When a script is named, it can be accessed using the global variable scriptVar.
PAGE 284
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 6: Instrument programming Example: Set a script to run automatically test5.autorun = "yes" test5.save() Assume a script named test5 is in the run-time environment. The next time the instrument is turned on, test5 script automatically loads and runs. Autoexec script The autoexec script runs automatically when the instrument is turned on. It runs after all the scripts have loaded and any scripts marked as autorun have run.
PAGE 285
Section 6: Instrument programming Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Save a user script You can save scripts to nonvolatile memory using commands or TSB Embedded. Only named scripts can be saved to nonvolatile memory. The anonymous script must be named before it can be saved to nonvolatile memory. If a script is not saved to nonvolatile memory, the script is lost when the instrument is turned off. To save a script to nonvolatile memory: 1.
PAGE 286
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 6: Instrument programming Delete user scripts These steps remove a script from nonvolatile memory. To completely remove a script from the instrument, there are additional steps you must take. See Delete user scripts from the instrument (on page 6-45). To delete a script from nonvolatile memory using a remote interface: You can delete the script from nonvolatile memory by sending either of the following commands: • • script.
PAGE 287
Section 6: Instrument programming Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual reset() -- Clear the display. display.clear() -- Prompt the user for a voltage value to source. srcVoltage = display.prompt("+000.00", " V", "Enter source voltage", 5, -20, 20) -- Prompt the user to enable measurements. measEnable = display.menu("Measurements?", "ENABLE DISABLE") if measEnable == "ENABLE" then -- Prompt the user for the number of measurements. numMeas = display.
PAGE 288
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 6: Instrument programming Fundamentals of programming for TSP Introduction To conduct a test, a computer (controller) is programmed to send sequences of commands to an instrument. The controller orchestrates the actions of the instrumentation. The controller is typically programmed to request measurement results from the instrumentation and make test sequence decisions based on those measurements.
PAGE 289
Section 6: Instrument programming Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Comments Comments start anywhere outside a string with a double hyphen (--). If the text immediately after a double hyphen (--) is anything other than double left brackets ([[), the comment is a short comment, which continues only until the end of the line.
PAGE 290
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 6: Instrument programming Do not use top-level command names as variable names. If you do, you will lose access to all commands that start with that name until the global variables are restored. For example, if you send the command digio = 5, you lose access to the digio.* commands. To restore the commands listed in the table (except node) and access to the digio.* commands, send the restoreglobals command or restart the instrument.
PAGE 291
Section 6: Instrument programming Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Variable types Variables can be one of the following types. Variable types and values Variable type returned Value Notes "nil" not declared The type of the value nil, whose main property is to be different from any other value; usually it represents the absence of a useful value. "boolean" true or false "number" number Boolean is the type of the values false and true.
PAGE 292
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 6: Instrument programming Example: Function function add_two(first_value, second_value) return first_value + second_value end print(add_two(3, 4), type(add_two)) 7 function Example: Table atable = {1, 2, 3, 4} print(atable, type(atable)) print(atable[1]) print(atable[4]) Defines a table with four numeric elements. Note that the "table" value (shown here as a096cd30) will vary.
PAGE 293
Section 6: Instrument programming Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual To execute a function, substitute appropriate values for parameterX and insert them into a message formatted as: myFunction(valueForParameterX, valueForParameterY) Where valueForParameterX and valueForParameterY represent the values to be passed to the function call for the given parameters. The output you get from these examples will vary depending on the data format settings of the instrument.
PAGE 294
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 6: Instrument programming The following steps use TSB Embedded. You can also use the loadscript and endscript commands to create the script over the remote interface. See Load a script by sending commands over the remote interface (on page 6-4). Steps to create a function using a script: 1. In TSB Embedded, enter a name into the TSP Script box. For example, type MakeMyFunction. 2. Enter the function as the body of the script.
PAGE 295
Section 6: Instrument programming Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Arithmetic operators Operator Description + addition − * subtraction / - division ^ multiplication negation (for example, c = −a) exponentiation Relational operators Operator Description < less than > <= >= ~= greater than less than or equal greater than or equal not equal == equal Logical operators The logical operators in Lua are and, or, and not.
PAGE 296
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 6: Instrument programming Example: Concatenation print(2 .. 3) print("Hello " .. "World") 23 Hello World Operator precedence Operator precedence in Lua follows the order below (from higher to lower priority): • • • • • • • • ^ (exponentiation) not, - (unary) *, / +, − .. (concatenation) <, >, <=, >=, ~=, == and or You can use parentheses to change the precedences in an expression. The concatenation ("..
PAGE 297
Section 6: Instrument programming Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual The syntax of a conditional block is as follows: if expression then block elseif expression then block else block end Where: • • expression is Lua code that evaluates to either true or false block consists of one or more Lua statements Example: If if 0 then print("Zero is true!") else print("Zero is false.
PAGE 298
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 6: Instrument programming Example: Else and elseif x = 1 y = 2 if x and y then print("'if' expression 2 was not false.") end if x or y then print("'if' expression 3 was not false.") end if not x then print("'if' expression 4 was not false.") else print("'if' expression 4 was false.") end if x == 10 then print("x = 10") elseif y > 2 then print("y > 2") else print("x is not equal to 10, and y is not greater than 2.
PAGE 299
Section 6: Instrument programming Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Example: While list = { "One", "Two", "Three", "Four", "Five", "Six"} print("Count list elements on numeric index:") element = 1 while list[element] do print(element, list[element]) element = element + 1 end This loop exits when list[element] = nil. Output: Count list elements on numeric index: 1 One 2 Two 3 Three 4 Four 5 Five 6 Six Repeat until loops To repeat a command, you use the repeat ...
PAGE 300
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 6: Instrument programming Example: Numeric for list = {"One", "Two", "Three", "Four", "Five", "Six"} ---------- For loop ----------print("Counting from one to three:") for element = 1, 3 do print(element, list[element]) end print("Counting from one to four, in steps of two:") for element = 1, 4, 2 do print(element, list[element]) end The numeric for loop repeats a block of code while a control variable runs through an arithmetic progress
PAGE 301
Section 6: Instrument programming Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Break The break statement can be used to terminate the execution of a while, repeat, or for loop, skipping to the next statement after the loop. A break ends the innermost enclosing loop. Return and break statements can only be written as the last statement of a block. If it is necessary to return or break in the middle of a block, an explicit inner block can be used.
PAGE 302
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 6: Instrument programming Example: Break with infinite loop a, b = 0, 1 while true do print(a, b) a, b = b, a + b if a > 500 then break end end This example uses a break statement that causes the while loop to exit if the value of a becomes greater than 500.
PAGE 303
Section 6: Instrument programming Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Standard libraries In addition to the standard programming constructs described in this document, Lua includes standard libraries that contain useful functions for string manipulation, mathematics, and related ® functions.
PAGE 304
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 6: Instrument programming Lua memory management Lua automatically manages memory, which means you do not have to allocate memory for new objects and free it when the objects are no longer needed. Lua occasionally runs a garbage collector to collect all objects that are no longer accessible from Lua. All objects in Lua are subject to automatic management, including tables, variables, functions, threads, and strings.
PAGE 305
Section 6: Instrument programming Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual String library functions Function string.lower(s) string.rep(s, n) 6-28 Description Receives a string and returns a copy of this string with all uppercase letters changed to lowercase. All other characters are left unchanged. Returns a string that is the concatenation of n copies of the string s. string.sub(s, i) string.
PAGE 306
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 6: Instrument programming Math library functions This library is an interface to most of the functions of the ANSI C math library. All trigonometric functions work in radians. The functions math.deg() and math.rad() convert between radians and degrees. Math library functions Function Description math.abs(x) Returns the absolute value of x. math.acos(x) Returns the arc cosine of x. math.asin(x) Returns the arc sine of x. math.
PAGE 307
Section 6: Instrument programming Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Programming example The following script puts a message on the front panel display slowly — one character at a time. The intent of this example is to demonstrate: • • • The use of a for loop Simple display remote commands Simple Lua string manipulation When creating a script using the TSB Embedded, you do not need the shell commands loadscript and endscript, as shown in the examples below.
PAGE 308
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 6: Instrument programming Installing the TSB add-in When you install the Test Script Builder Software Suite, all available updates for TSB Add-in software are also installed. This includes any additional tools for the Test Script Builder Integrated Development Environment (TSB), and also Series 2600B-specific examples and help files (see Installing the TSB software (on page 6-30)).
PAGE 309
Section 6: Instrument programming Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Figure 112: Example of the Test Script Builder workspace Item Description 1 2 3 Project navigator Script editor; right-click to run the script that is displayed Outline view 4 Programming interaction 5 Help; includes detailed information on using Test Script Builder Project navigator The project navigator consists of project folders and the script files (.tsp) created for each project.
PAGE 310
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 6: Instrument programming Script editor The script editor is where scripts are written, modified, and debugged. To open and display a script file, double-click the file name in the project navigator. You can have multiple script files open in the script editor at the same time. Each open script file is displayed on a separate tab.
PAGE 311
Section 6: Instrument programming Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual The Outline tab is visible by default in the TSP perspective. Icon [] Name Examples Global function variable function gFunction() end Local function variable local function lFunction() end Anonymous function myTest(function() return 1 end) Global table variable gTable = { } Local table variable local lTable = { } Other table field Global variable testTable.unit1 = "This is unit 1" testTable.
PAGE 312
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 6: Instrument programming Password overview Passwords can contain up to 255 characters. If the password feature is enabled, a password is required to view and modify the following web pages: • • • • • • IP configuration Set password TSB Embedded Reading buffers Flash upgrade ® TSP Express Complete the following steps to set the password. 1. From the web interface, click Set Password.
PAGE 313
Section 6: Instrument programming Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Setting the password from a command interface The password is set (or changed) by setting the localnode.password attribute. For example: localnode.password = "Keithley" The attribute localnode.passwordmode enables passwords and sets the mode. The password mode identifies which interface to password protect. Use one of the following attributes to set the password mode. localnode.PASSWORD_WEB.
PAGE 314
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 6: Instrument programming Resetting the password If you forget the password, you can reset the password from the front panel. Once you enable the password feature, the Series 2600B stores this password until the LAN configuration is reset or until you reset the password. Complete the following steps to reset the password: • From the front panel, press the MENU key, and then select RESET-PASSWORD.
PAGE 315
Section 6: Instrument programming Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual You cannot retrieve a deleted script. Be sure to back up your script to your computer before deleting. To delete a script from TSB embedded: 1. Select the script from the User Scripts area. 2. Click Delete. To modify a script: 1. 2. 3. 4. Select the script from the User Scripts area. Modify the code in the script editor. Click Save Script to validate the syntax and save the script.
PAGE 316
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 6: Instrument programming When you create a script using the script.new() function without providing a name, the script is added to the run-time environment as an unnamed script. The script.new() function returns the script, but the script is not added to the script.user.scripts table. When the anonymous script is loaded, it does not have a global variable or an entry in the script.user.scripts table.
PAGE 317
Section 6: Instrument programming Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Create a script using the script.new() command Use the script.new() function to copy an existing script from the local node to a remote node. This enables parallel script execution. You can create a script with the script.new() function using the command: scriptVar = script.
PAGE 318
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 6: Instrument programming When you create a script using script.new(), if you do not include name, the script is added to the run-time environment as an unnamed script. The script.new() function returns the script. You can assign it to a global variable, a local variable, or ignore the return value. A global variable is not automatically created. For example, send the following command: hello = script.new('display.clear() display.
PAGE 319
Section 6: Instrument programming Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Figure 116: Create a new script with the name of an existing script Rename a script You can rename a script. You might want to rename a script if you need to name another script the same name as the existing script. You could also rename an existing script to be the autoexec script. To change the name of a script, use the command: scriptVar.
PAGE 320
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 6: Instrument programming If the new name is the same as a name that is already used for a script, the name of the existing script is removed and that script becomes unnamed. This removes the existing script if there are no other variables that reference the previous script. If variables do reference the existing script, the references remain intact.
PAGE 321
Section 6: Instrument programming Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Retrieve a user script There are several ways to retrieve the source code of a user script: • • One line at a time: Use scriptVar.list() to retrieve the source code one line at a time • Use TSB Embedded Entire script: Use the print(scriptVar.
PAGE 322
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 6: Instrument programming Retrieve a script as a single string To retrieve the entire user script source code as a single string, use the scriptVar.source attribute. The loadscript or loadandrunscript and endscript keywords are not included. To retrieve the source code as a single string, send the command: print(scriptVar.source) Where scriptVar is the name of the script. Example: Retrieve the source code as a single string print(test.
PAGE 323
Section 6: Instrument programming Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Restore a script to the run-time environment You can retrieve a script that was removed from the run-time environment but is still saved in nonvolatile memory. To restore a script from nonvolatile memory into the run-time environment, you can use script.restore("scriptName"), where scriptName is the user-defined name of the script to be restored.
PAGE 324
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 6: Instrument programming Note that the dedicated reading buffers do not consume memory that is needed by the run-time environment; do not include them in your memory consumption calculations. Also, reading buffers for remote nodes consume memory on the remote node, not the local node.
PAGE 325
Section 6: Instrument programming Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Overview ® The TSP-Link expansion interface allows the Series 2600B instrument to communicate with other ® Test Script Processor (TSP ) enabled instruments. The test system can be expanded to include up to 32 TSP-Link enabled instruments.
PAGE 326
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 6: Instrument programming TSP-Link system ® You can use the TSP-Link expansion interface to expand your test system to include up to 32 ® ® addressable TSP enabled instruments that use the TSP-LINK . The expanded system can be standalone or computer-based. Stand-alone system: You can run a script from the front panel of any instrument (node) connected to the system.
PAGE 327
Section 6: Instrument programming Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Connections Connections for an expanded system are shown in the following figure. As shown, one instrument is optionally connected to the computer using the GPIB, LAN, USB, or RS-232 interface. Details about these computer communication connections are described in Remote communication interfaces (on page 2-89).
PAGE 328
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 6: Instrument programming To assign a node number using a remote command: Set the tsplink.node attribute of the instrument: tsplink.node = N Where: N = 1 to 64 To determine the node number of an instrument, you can read the tsplink.node attribute by sending the following command: print(tsplink.node) The above print command outputs the node number. For example, if the node number is 1, a 1 is displayed.
PAGE 329
Section 6: Instrument programming Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual The programming example below illustrates a TSP-Link reset operation and displays its state: tsplink.reset() print(tsplink.state) If the reset operation is successful, online is output to indicate that communications with all nodes have been established. Using the expanded system Accessing nodes ® A TSP-Link reset command populates the node table.
PAGE 330
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 6: Instrument programming Using the reset() command ® Most TSP-Link system operations target a single node in the system, but the reset() command affects the system as a whole by resetting all nodes to their default settings: -- Reset all nodes in a TSP-Link system to their default state. reset() Using the reset() command in a TSP-Link network differs from using the tsplink.reset() command. The tsplink.
PAGE 331
Section 6: Instrument programming Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual There are two methods you can use to run test scripts simultaneously: • • Create multiple TSP-Link networks Use a single TSP-Link network with groups The following figure displays the first method, which consists of multiple TSP-Link networks. Each TSP-Link network has a master node and a GPIB connection to the computer. Figure 119: Multiple TSP-Link networks 6-54 2600BS-901-01 Rev.
PAGE 332
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 6: Instrument programming The second method you can use to run simultaneous test scripts is to use groups with a single TSP-Link network. Each group on the TSP-Link network can run a test while other groups are running different tests. A group consists of one or more nodes with the same group number. The following figure displays a single TSP-Link network with groups.
PAGE 333
Section 6: Instrument programming Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual TSP-Link network group functions 2 3 Group leader Node 5 Runs the test script initiated by the master node Initiates remote operations on node 4 Node 4 Performs remote operations initiated by node 5 Group leader Node 6 Runs the test script initiated by the master node Using groups to manage nodes on TSP-Link network The primary purpose of groups is to allow each group to run a different test script simul
PAGE 334
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 6: Instrument programming Assigning groups Group numbers can range from zero (0) to 64. The default group number is 0. You can change the group number at any time. You can also add or remove a node to or from a group at any time. Each time the node's power is turned off, the group number for that node changes to 0. The following example code dynamically assigns a node to a group: -- Assign node 3 to group 1. node[3].tsplink.
PAGE 335
Section 6: Instrument programming Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual For additional information, see waitcomplete() (on page 7-380). The following code shows two examples of using the waitcomplete() command from the master node: -- Wait for each node in group N to complete all overlapped operations. waitcomplete(N) -- Wait for all groups on the TSP-Link network to complete overlapped operations.
PAGE 336
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 6: Instrument programming Removing stale values from the reading buffer cache The node that acquires the data also stores the data for the reading buffer. To optimize data access, all nodes can cache data from the node that stores the reading buffer data. When you run Lua code remotely, it can cause reading buffer data that is held in the cache to become stale.
PAGE 337
Section 6: Instrument programming Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual TSP-Net capabilities The TSP-Net library permits the Series 2600B to control a remote instrument through the LAN port for ® both Test Script Processor (TSP ) and non-TSP instruments. Using TSP-Net library methods, you can transfer string data to and from a remote instrument, transfer and format data into Lua variables, and clear input buffers.
PAGE 338
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 6: Instrument programming To setup communication to a remote ethernet device that is not TSP enabled: 1. Send the command: connectionID = tspnet.connect(ipAddress, portNumber, initString) Where: • connectionID is the connection ID that will be used as a handle in all other TSP-Net function calls. • ipAddress is the IP address of the remote device. • portNumber is the port number of the remote device.
PAGE 339
Section 6: Instrument programming Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual TSP-Net compared to TSP-Link to communicate with TSP-enabled devices ® The TSP-Link network interface is the preferred communication method for most applications where communication occurs between the Series 2600B and another TSP-enabled instrument.
PAGE 340
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 6: Instrument programming Example: Using tspnet commands function telnetConnect(ipAddress, userName, password) -- Connect through Telnet to a computer. id = tspnet.connect(ipAddress, 23, "") -- Read the title and login prompt from the computer. print(string.format("from computer--> (%s)", tspnet.read(id, "%n"))) print(string.format("from computer--> (%s)", tspnet.read(id, "%s"))) -- Send the login name. tspnet.write(id, userName ..
PAGE 341
Section 7 TSP command reference In this section: TSP command programming notes.......................................... 7-1 Using the TSP command reference ......................................... 7-4 TSP commands........................................................................ 7-7 TSP command programming notes This section contains general information about using TSP commands.
PAGE 342
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Placeholder text This manual uses italicized text to represent the parts of remote commands that must be replaced by user specified values. The following examples show typical uses of italicized text: Example 1: gpib.address = address Where: address is an integer (0 to 30) that you specify. For example, to set this attribute to 15 you would send: gpib.address = 15 Example 2: digio.trigger[N].
PAGE 343
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 7: TSP command reference Syntax rules The following table lists syntax requirements to build well-formed instrument control commands. Syntax rules for instrument commands Syntax rule Details Case sensitivity: Function and attribute Instrument names should be in commands are case lowercase characters. sensitive. Examples An example of the scriptVar.save() function (where test8 is the name of the script): test8.
PAGE 344
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Using the TSP command reference The TSP command reference contains detailed descriptions of each of the TSP commands that you can use to control your instrument. Each command description is broken into subsections. The figure below shows an example of a command description. Figure 121: Example instrument command description The subsections contain information about the command.
PAGE 345
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 7: TSP command reference 1. Instrument command name. Indicates the beginning of the command description. It is followed by a brief description of what the command does. 2. Type of command. Commands can be functions, attributes, or constants. If the command is an attribute, it can be read-only (R), read-write (RW), or write-only (W). For detail on commands, see Introduction to TSP operation (on page 5-1). 3. TSP-Link accessible.
PAGE 346
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual 3. Parameter value options: Descriptions of the options that are available for the user-defined parameter. Command details This section lists additional information you need to know to successfully use the remote commands. Figure 124: Details section of command listing Example section The Example section of the remote command description shows some simple examples of how the command can be used.
PAGE 347
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 7: TSP command reference TSP commands beeper.beep() generates an audible tone. Type TSP-Link accessible Function Yes Affected by Where saved Default value Usage beeper.beep(duration, frequency) duration The amount of time to play the tone in seconds (0.
PAGE 348
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Example Enables the beeper and generates a two-second, 2400 Hz tone. beeper.enable = beeper.ON beeper.beep(2, 2400) Also see beeper.beep() (on page 7-7) bit.bitand() This function performs a bitwise logical AND operation on two numbers. Type TSP-Link accessible Function No Affected by Where saved Default value Usage result = bit.
PAGE 349
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 7: TSP command reference Details Any fractional parts of value1 and value2 are truncated to make them integers. The returned result is also an integer. Example testResult = bit.bitor(10, 9) print(testResult) Performs a bitwise logical OR operation on decimal 10 (binary 1010) with decimal 9 (binary 1001), which returns a value of decimal 11 (binary 1011). Output: 1.
PAGE 350
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual bit.clear() This function clears a bit at a specified index position. Type TSP-Link accessible Function No Affected by Where saved Default value Usage result = bit.clear(value, index) result value index Result of the bit manipulation Specified number One-based bit position within value to clear (1 to 32) Details Any fractional part of value is truncated to make it an integer.
PAGE 351
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 7: TSP command reference Details This function returns the value of the bit in value at index. This is the same as returning value with all other bits set to zero (0). The least significant bit of value is at index position 1; the most significant bit is at index position 32. If the indexed bit for the number is set to zero (0), the result will be zero (0). Example The binary equivalent of decimal 10 is 1010.
PAGE 352
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Also see Bit manipulation and logic operations (on page 5-3) bit.get() (on page 7-10) bit.set() (on page 7-12) bit.setfield() (on page 7-12) bit.set() This function sets a bit at the specified index position. Type TSP-Link accessible Function No Affected by Where saved Default value Usage result = bit.
PAGE 353
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 7: TSP command reference Usage result = bit.setfield(value, index, width, fieldValue) result Result of the bit manipulation value index Specified number One-based bit position in value to set (1 to 32) width The number of bits to include in the field (1 to 32) Value to write to the field fieldValue Details This function returns result, which is value with a field of bits overwritten, starting at index.
PAGE 354
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Details This function returns result, which is the result of the tested bit. The least significant bit of value is at index position 1; the most significant bit is at index position 32. If the indexed bit for value is 0, result is false. If the bit of value at index is 1, the returned value is true. If index is bigger than the number of bits in value, the result is false. Example testResult = bit.
PAGE 355
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 7: TSP command reference Also see Bit manipulation and logic operations (on page 5-3) bit.clear() (on page 7-10) bit.get() (on page 7-10) bit.set() (on page 7-12) bit.test() (on page 7-13) bufferVar.appendmode This attribute sets the state of the reading buffer's append mode. Type TSP-Link accessible Affected by Where saved Default value Attribute (RW) Yes Not applicable See Details 0 (disabled) Usage state = bufferVar.
PAGE 356
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Usage basetime = bufferVar.basetimestamp basetime bufferVar The timestamp of the first stored reading The reading buffer; can be a dynamically allocated buffer (user-defined), or a dedicated reading buffer (such as smua.nvbuffer1) Details This read-only attribute contains the timestamp (in seconds) of the first reading stored in a buffer (rb[1] stored in reading buffer rb).
PAGE 357
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 7: TSP command reference Details Assigning a value to this attribute enables or disables the reading buffer cache. When enabled, the reading buffer cache improves access speed to reading buffer data. If you run successive operations that overwrite reading buffer data, the reading buffer may return stale cache data.
PAGE 358
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Example bufferCapacity = smua.nvbuffer1.capacity print(bufferCapacity) Reads the capacity of dedicated reading buffer 1 (source-measure unit (SMU) channel A). Output: 1.49789e+05 The above output indicates that the buffer can hold 149789 readings. Also see Reading buffers (on page 3-6) smuX.makebuffer() (on page 7-197) smuX.measure.overlappedY() (on page 7-209) smuX.measure.Y() (on page 7-213) smuX.
PAGE 359
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 7: TSP command reference Usage bufferVar.clearcache() bufferVar The reading buffer; can be a dynamically allocated user-defined buffer or a dedicated reading buffer Details This function clears all readings from the specified cache. If you run successive operations that overwrite reading buffer data, the reading buffer may return stale cache data.
PAGE 360
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Details Assigning a value to this attribute enables or disables the storage of source values. Reading this attribute returns the state of source value collection. This value can only be changed with an empty buffer. Empty the buffer using the bufferVar.clear() function. For dedicated reading buffers, all buffer attributes are saved to nonvolatile memory only when the reading buffer is saved to nonvolatile memory.
PAGE 361
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 7: TSP command reference Example smua.nvbuffer1.collecttimestamps = 1 Include timestamps with readings for dedicated reading buffer 1 (source-measure unit (SMU) channel A). Also see bufferVar.clear() (on page 7-18) Reading buffers (on page 3-6) smuX.measure.overlappedY() (on page 7-209) smuX.measure.Y() (on page 7-213) smuX.nvbufferY (on page 7-215) smuX.trigger.measure.Y() (on page 7-244) bufferVar.
PAGE 362
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual bufferVar.fillmode This attribute sets the reading buffer fill mode. Type TSP-Link accessible Affected by Where saved Default value Attribute (RW) Yes Not applicable See Details 0 (smuX.FILL_ONCE) Usage fillMode = bufferVar.fillmode bufferVar.fillmode = fillMode fillMode The reading buffer fill mode; set to one of the following: • • bufferVar 0 or smuX.FILL_ONCE: Do not overwrite old data 1 or smuX.
PAGE 363
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 7: TSP command reference Usage measurefunction = bufferVar.measurefunctions[N] measurefunction bufferVar N The measurement function used ("current", "voltage", "ohms", or "watts") to acquire reading number N in the specified buffer The reading buffer; can be a dynamically allocated buffer (user-defined), or a dedicated reading buffer (such as smua.nvbuffer1) The reading number (1 to bufferVar.
PAGE 364
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Usage measurerange = bufferVar.measureanges[N] measurerange bufferVar The measurement range used to acquire reading number N in the specified buffer The reading buffer; can be a dynamically allocated buffer (user-defined), or a dedicated reading buffer (such as smua.nvbuffer1) N The reading number (1 to bufferVar.
PAGE 365
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 7: TSP command reference Details This read-only attribute contains the number of readings presently stored in the buffer. For dedicated reading buffers, all buffer attributes are saved to nonvolatile memory only when the reading buffer is saved to nonvolatile memory. Example numberOfReadings = smua.nvbuffer1.n print(numberOfReadings) Reads the number of readings stored in dedicated reading buffer 1 (source-measure unit (SMU) channel A).
PAGE 366
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Example Output the first reading saved in source-measure unit (SMU) channel A, dedicated reading buffer 1. Output: print(smua.nvbuffer1.readings[1]) 8.81658e-08 Also see bufferVar.measurefunctions (on page 7-22) bufferVar.measureranges (on page 7-23) bufferVar.n (on page 7-24) bufferVar.sourcefunctions (on page 7-26) bufferVar.sourceoutputstates (on page 7-27) bufferVar.sourceranges (on page 7-28) bufferVar.
PAGE 367
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 7: TSP command reference Example 2 printbuffer(1, 10, smua.nvbuffer1.sourcefunctions) Print the source function used for 10 readings stored in source-measure unit (SMU) channel A, dedicated reading buffer 1. Example output: Voltage, Voltage, Voltage, Voltage, Voltage, Voltage, Voltage, Voltage, Voltage, Voltage Also see bufferVar.measurefunctions (on page 7-22) bufferVar.measureranges (on page 7-23) bufferVar.
PAGE 368
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Also see bufferVar.measurefunctions (on page 7-22) bufferVar.measureranges (on page 7-23) bufferVar.n (on page 7-24) bufferVar.readings (on page 7-25) bufferVar.sourcefunctions (on page 7-26) bufferVar.sourceranges (on page 7-28) bufferVar.sourcevalues (on page 7-29) bufferVar.statuses (on page 7-30) bufferVar.timestamps (on page 7-32) Reading buffers (on page 3-6) \ bufferVar.
PAGE 369
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 7: TSP command reference Example 2 Print the source ranges that were used for the first 6 readings stored in source-measure unit (SMU) A, buffer 1. Example output: 1.00000e-04, 1.00000e-04, 1.00000e-04, 1.00000e-04, 1.00000e-04, 1.00000e-04 printbuffer(1, 6, smua.nvbuffer1.sourceranges) Also see bufferVar.measurefunctions (on page 7-22) bufferVar.measureranges (on page 7-23) bufferVar.n (on page 7-24) bufferVar.
PAGE 370
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Example 2 Print the sourced value of the first 6 readings stored in source-measure unit (SMU) A, buffer 1. Example output: 1.00000e-04, 1.00000e-04, 1.00000e-04, 1.00000e-04, 1.00000e-04, 1.00000e-04 printbuffer(1, 6, smua.nvbuffer1.sourcevalues) Also see bufferVar.measurefunctions (on page 7-22) bufferVar.measureranges (on page 7-23) bufferVar.n (on page 7-24) bufferVar.readings (on page 7-25) bufferVar.
PAGE 371
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 7: TSP command reference Details This read-only buffer recall attribute is like an array (a Lua table) of the status values for all the readings in the buffer. The status values are floating-point numbers that encode the status value; see the following table for values. For dedicated reading buffers, all buffer attributes are saved to nonvolatile memory only when the reading buffer is saved to nonvolatile memory.
PAGE 372
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Details Assigning a value to this attribute sets the resolution for the timestamps. Reading this attribute returns the timestamp resolution value. This value can only be changed with an empty buffer. Empty the buffer using the bufferVar.clear() function. The finest timestamp resolution is 0.000001 seconds (1 μs). At this resolution, the reading buffer can store unique timestamps for up to 71 minutes.
PAGE 373
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 7: TSP command reference Example timestamp = smua.nvbuffer1.timestamps[1] Get the timestamp of the first reading stored in source-measure unit (SMU) A, buffer 1. Also see bufferVar.clear() (on page 7-18) bufferVar.collecttimestamps (on page 7-20) bufferVar.measurefunctions (on page 7-22) bufferVar.measureranges (on page 7-23) bufferVar.n (on page 7-24) bufferVar.readings (on page 7-25) bufferVar.
PAGE 374
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual buffer Reading buffer where pulsed measurements will be stored; if this is nil when the function is called, no measurements will be made when the pulse train is initiated tag sync_in Numeric identifier to be assigned to the defined pulse train sync_out Defines a digital I/O trigger output line; if programmed, the pulse train generates a trigger output immediately before the start of ton sync_in_timeout sync
PAGE 375
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 7: TSP command reference ConfigPulseIMeasureVSweepLin() This KIPulse factory script function configures a linear pulsed current sweep with a voltage measurement at each point.
PAGE 376
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Details Data for pulsed voltage measurements are stored in the reading buffer specified by the buffer input parameter. This function configures a linear pulsed current sweep with a voltage measurement at each point. Measurements are made at the end of the ton time. The magnitude of the first pulse will be start amperes; the magnitude of the last pulse will be stop amperes.
PAGE 377
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 7: TSP command reference ConfigPulseIMeasureVSweepLog() This KIPulse factory script function configures a voltage pulse train with a current measurement at each point.
PAGE 378
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Details Data for pulsed voltage measurements are stored in the reading buffer specified by the buffer input parameter. This function configures a logarithmic pulsed current sweep with a voltage measurement at each point. Measurements are made at the end of the ton time. The magnitude of the first pulse will be start amperes; the magnitude of the last pulse will be stop amperes.
PAGE 379
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 7: TSP command reference ConfigPulseVMeasureI() This KIPulse factory script function configures a voltage pulse train with a current measurement at each point.
PAGE 380
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Figure 130: ConfigPulseVMeasureI() Example 1 ConfigPulseVMeasureI(smua, 0, 20, 1, 0.001, 0.080, 10, smua.nvbuffer1, 2) Set up a pulse train that uses System ® SourceMeter instrument channel A. The pulse amplitude is 20 V and returns to 0 V after 1 ms. The pulse remains at 0 V for 80 ms, and the current limit is 1 A during the pulse.
PAGE 381
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 7: TSP command reference ConfigPulseVMeasureISweepLin() This KIPulse factory script function configures a voltage pulse train with a current measurement at each point.
PAGE 382
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual This function does not cause the specified smu to output a pulse train. It does check to see if all the pulse dimensions can be achieved, and if they can, assigns the indicated tag or index to the pulse train. The InitiatePulseTest(tag) and InitiatePulseTestDual(tag1, tag2) functions are used to initiate a pulse train assigned to a valid tag.
PAGE 383
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 7: TSP command reference ConfigPulseVMeasureISweepLog() 1 This KIPulse factory script function configures a voltage pulse train with a current measurement at each point.
PAGE 384
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Details Data for pulsed current measurements are stored in the reading buffer specified by the buffer input parameter. This function configures a logarithmic pulsed voltage sweep with a current measurement at each point. Measurements are made at the end of the ton time. The magnitude of the first pulse will be start volts; the magnitude of the last pulse will be stop volts.
PAGE 385
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 7: TSP command reference dataqueue.add() This function adds an entry to the data queue. Type TSP-Link accessible Function Yes Affected by Where saved Default value Usage result = dataqueue.add(value) result = dataqueue.
PAGE 386
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual dataqueue.CAPACITY This constant is the maximum number of entries that you can store in the data queue. Type TSP-Link accessible Constant Yes Affected by Where saved Default value Usage count = dataqueue.CAPACITY count The variable that is assigned the value of dataqueue.CAPACITY Details This constant always returns the maximum number of entries that can be stored in the data queue.
PAGE 387
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 7: TSP command reference Example This example fills the data queue and prints the number of items in the queue. It then clears the queue and prints the number of items again. Output: There are 128 items in the data queue There are 0 items in the data queue MaxCount = dataqueue.CAPACITY while dataqueue.count < MaxCount do dataqueue.add(1) end print("There are " .. dataqueue.count .. " items in the data queue") dataqueue.
PAGE 388
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual dataqueue.next() This function removes the next entry from the data queue. Type TSP-Link accessible Function Yes Affected by Where saved Default value Usage value = dataqueue.next() value = dataqueue.next(timeout) value timeout The next entry in the data queue The number of seconds to wait for data in the queue Details If the data queue is empty, the function waits up to the timeout value.
PAGE 389
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 7: TSP command reference delay() This function delays the execution of the commands that follow it. Type TSP-Link accessible Function No Affected by Where saved Default value Usage delay(seconds) seconds The number of seconds to delay (1 to 100,000 s) Details You cannot set a delay for zero seconds. The instrument delays execution of the commands for at least the specified number of seconds and fractional seconds.
PAGE 390
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Details A returned value of zero (0) indicates that the line is low. A returned value of one (1) indicates that the line is high. Example Assume line 4 is set high, and it is then read. Output: 1.00000e+00 print(digio.readbit(4)) Also see digio.readport() (on page 7-50) digio.writebit() (on page 7-58) digio.writeport() (on page 7-59) Digital I/O port (on page 3-83) digio.
PAGE 391
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 7: TSP command reference digio.trigger[N].assert() This function asserts a trigger on one of the digital I/O lines. This function is not available on the Models 2604B/2614B/2634B. Type TSP-Link accessible Function Yes Affected by Where saved Default value Usage digio.trigger[N].assert() Digital I/O trigger line (1 to 14) N Details The set pulsewidth determines how long the trigger is asserted.
PAGE 392
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual digio.trigger[N].EVENT_ID This constant identifies the trigger event generated by the digital I/O line N. This constant is not available on the Models 2604B/2614B/2634B. Type TSP-Link accessible Constant Yes Affected by Where saved Default value Usage eventID = digio.trigger[N].
PAGE 393
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 7: TSP command reference Details Set triggerMode to one of the following values: Trigger mode values triggerMode Description digio.TRIG_BYPASS or 0 Allows direct control of the line. digio.TRIG_FALLING or 1 Detects falling-edge triggers as input; asserts a TTL-low pulse for output. If the programmed state of the line is high, the digio.TRIG_RISING mode behavior is similar to digio.TRIG_RISINGA.
PAGE 394
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual digio.trigger[N].overrun Use this attribute to read the event detector overrun status. This attribute is not available on the Models 2604B/2614B/2634B. Type TSP-Link accessible Affected by Where saved Default value Attribute (R) Yes Instrument reset Digital I/O trigger N clear Digital I/O trigger N reset Recall setup Not saved Not applicable Usage overrun = digio.trigger[N].
PAGE 395
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 7: TSP command reference Example Sets the pulse width for trigger line 4 to 20 μs. digio.trigger[4].pulsewidth = 20e-6 Also see digio.trigger[N].assert() (on page 7-51) digio.trigger[N].reset() (on page 7-55) digio.trigger[N].release() (on page 7-55) digio.trigger[N].release() This function releases an indefinite length or latched trigger. This function is not available on the Models 2604B/2614B/2634B.
PAGE 396
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Details This function resets the following attributes to factory default settings: • digio.trigger[N].mode • digio.trigger[N].pulsewidth • digio.trigger[N].stimulus It also clears digio.trigger[N].overrun. Example digio.trigger[3].mode = 2 digio.trigger[3].pulsewidth = 50e-6 digio.trigger[3].stimulus = digio.trigger[5].EVENT_ID print(digio.trigger[3].mode, digio.trigger[3].pulsewidth, digio.trigger[3].
PAGE 397
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 7: TSP command reference The trigger stimulus for a digital I/O line may be set to one of the existing trigger event IDs, described in the following table. Trigger event IDs* Event ID** Event description smuX.trigger.
PAGE 398
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Also see digio.trigger[N].assert() (on page 7-51) digio.trigger[N].clear() (on page 7-51) digio.trigger[N].reset() (on page 7-55) digio.trigger[N].wait() This function waits for a trigger. This function is not available on the Models 2604B/2614B/2634B. Type TSP-Link accessible Function Yes Affected by Where saved Default value Usage triggered = digio.trigger[N].
PAGE 399
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 7: TSP command reference Details If the output line is write-protected using the digio.writeprotect attribute, the command is ignored. The reset() function does not affect the present state of the digital I/O lines. Use the digio.writebit() and digio.writeport() commands to control the output state of the synchronization line when trigger operation is set to digio.TRIG_BYPASS. The data must be zero (0) to clear the bit.
PAGE 400
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual digio.writeprotect This attribute contains the write-protect mask that protects bits from changes from the digio.writebit() and digio.writeport() functions. This attribute is not available on the Models 2604B/2614B/2634B. Type TSP-Link accessible Affected by Where saved Default value Attribute (RW) Yes Instrument reset Recall setup Saved setup 0 Usage mask = digio.writeprotect digio.
PAGE 401
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 7: TSP command reference display.getannunciators() This function reads the annunciators (indicators) that are presently turned on. Type TSP-Link accessible Function Yes Affected by Where saved Default value Usage annunciators = display.getannunciators() The bitmasked value that shows which indicators are turned on annunciators Details This function returns a bitmasked value showing which indicators are turned on.
PAGE 402
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Example 2 Output: 2.56000e+02 print(display.ANNUNCIATOR_EDIT) print(display.ANNUNCIATOR_TRIGGER) 3.20000e+01 print(display.ANNUNCIATOR_AUTO) 8.00000e+00 Also see bit.bitand() (on page 7-8) display.getcursor() This function reads the present position of the cursor on the front panel display. Type TSP-Link accessible Function Yes Affected by Where saved Default value Usage row, column, style = display.
PAGE 403
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 7: TSP command reference display.getlastkey() This function retrieves the key code for the last pressed key. Type TSP-Link accessible Function Yes Affected by Where saved Default value Usage keyCode = display.
PAGE 404
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual The OUTPUT ON/OFF controls for SMU A or SMU B cannot be tracked by this function. Example key = display.getlastkey() print(key) On the front panel, press the MENU key and then send the code shown here. This retrieves the key code for the last pressed key. Output: 6.80000e+01 Also see display.locallockout (on page 7-69) display.sendkey() (on page 7-73) display.
PAGE 405
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 7: TSP command reference Example 1 display.clear() display.setcursor(1, 1) display.settext("ABCDEFGHIJ$DKLMNOPQRST") display.setcursor(2, 1) display.settext("abcdefghijklm$Bnopqrstuvwxyz$F123456") print(display.gettext()) print(display.gettext(true)) print(display.gettext(false, 2)) print(display.gettext(true, 2, 9)) print(display.gettext(false, 2, 9, 10)) This example shows how to retrieve the display text in multiple ways.
PAGE 406
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Details The format parameter uses zeros (0), the decimal point, polarity sign, and exponents to define how the input field is formatted. The format parameter can include the options shown in the following table.
PAGE 407
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 7: TSP command reference display.loadmenu.add() This function adds an entry to the USER TESTS menu, which can be accessed by pressing the LOAD key on the instrument front panel. Type TSP-Link accessible Function Yes Affected by Where saved Default value Usage display.loadmenu.add(displayName, code) display.loadmenu.
PAGE 408
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Example 2 display.loadmenu.add( "Test", "DUT1() beeper.beep(2, 500)", display.SAVE) Assume a script with a function named “DUT1” has already been loaded into the instrument, and the script has NOT been saved in nonvolatile memory. Now assume you want to add a test named “Test” to the USER TESTS menu. You want the test to run the function named “DUT1” and sound the beeper.
PAGE 409
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 7: TSP command reference Example Output: Test DUT1() beeper.beep(2, 500) Part1 testpart([[Part1]], 5.0) Test9 Test9() for displayName, code in display.loadmenu.catalog() do print(displayName, code) end Also see display.loadmenu.add() (on page 7-67) display.loadmenu.delete() (on page 7-69) display.loadmenu.
PAGE 410
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Details Set display.locallockout to display.LOCK to prevent the user from interrupting remote operation by pressing the EXIT (LOCAL) key. Set this attribute to display.UNLOCK to allow the EXIT (LOCAL) key to interrupt script or remote operation. Example display.locallockout = display.LOCK Disables the front-panel EXIT (LOCAL) key. Also see None display.
PAGE 411
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 7: TSP command reference display.numpad This attribute controls whether the front panel keys act as a numeric keypad during value entry. Type TSP-Link accessible Affected by Where saved Default value Attribute (RW) Yes Instrument reset Recall setup Saved setup 1 (display.ENABLE) Usage numericKeypad = display.numpad display.numpad = numericKeypad numericKeypad Enable the numeric keypad feature (1 or display.
PAGE 412
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Details This function creates an editable input field at the present cursor position, and an input prompt message on the bottom line. Example of a displayed input field and prompt: 0.00V Input 0 to +2V The format parameter uses zeros (0), the decimal point, polarity sign, and exponents to define how the input field is formatted. The format parameter can include the options shown in the following table.
PAGE 413
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 7: TSP command reference display.screen This attribute contains the selected display screen. Type TSP-Link accessible Affected by Where saved Default value Attribute (RW) Yes Instrument reset Recall setup Saved setup Models 2601B/2611B/2635B: 0 (display.SMUA) Models 2602B/2604B/2612B/2614B/2634B/ 2636B: 2 (display.SMUA_SMUB) Usage displayID = display.screen display.
PAGE 414
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Details This command simulates the pressing of a front panel key or navigation wheel, or the turning the navigation wheel one click to the left or right. Key codes Value Key list Value Key list 0 display.KEY_NONE 82 display.KEY_ENTER 65 display.KEY_RANGEUP 83 display.KEY_MEASB 66 display.KEY_MODEB 84 display.KEY_DIGITSB 67 display.KEY_RELB 85 display.KEY_RECALL 68 display.
PAGE 415
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 7: TSP command reference display.setcursor() This function sets the position of the cursor. Type TSP-Link accessible Function Yes Affected by Where saved Default value Usage display.setcursor(row, column) display.
PAGE 416
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual display.settext() This function displays text on the user screen. Type TSP-Link accessible Function Yes Affected by Where saved Default value Usage display.settext(text) Text message to be displayed, with optional character codes text Details This function selects the user display screen and displays the given text.
PAGE 417
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 7: TSP command reference Also see display.clear() (on page 7-60) display.getcursor() (on page 7-62) display.gettext() (on page 7-64) display.screen (on page 7-73) display.setcursor() (on page 7-75) display.smuX.digits This attribute sets the display resolution of the selected measurement. Type TSP-Link accessible Affected by Where saved Default value Attribute (RW) Yes Instrument reset Recall setup Saved setup 5 (display.
PAGE 418
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Usage func = display.smuX.limit.func display.smuX.limit.func = func func One of the following values: 0 or display.LIMIT_IV: Displays the primary limit setting 1 or display.LIMIT_P: Displays the power limit setting X Source-measure unit (SMU) channel (for example, display.smua.limit.func applies to SMU channel A) Details Selects the displayed limit function: primary (IV) or power (P).
PAGE 419
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 7: TSP command reference Also see display.smuX.limit.func (on page 7-77) display.trigger.clear() This function clears the front-panel trigger event detector. Type TSP-Link accessible Function Yes Affected by Where saved Default value Usage display.trigger.clear() Details The trigger event detector remembers if an event has been detected since the last display.trigger.wait() call.
PAGE 420
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Usage overrun = display.trigger.overrun overrun The trigger overrun state Details Indicates if a trigger event was ignored because the event detector was already in the detected state when the TRIG button was pressed. Indicates the overrun state of the event detector built into the display.
PAGE 421
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 7: TSP command reference display.waitkey() This function captures the key code value for the next front-panel action. Type TSP-Link accessible Function Yes Affected by Where saved Default value Usage keyCode = display.
PAGE 422
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Example Pause script execution until the operator presses a key or the navigation wheel , or rotates the navigation wheel. If the output is: 8.60000e+01 It indicates that the MEAS(A) key was pressed. key = display.waitkey() print(key) Also see Capturing key-press codes (on page 3-81) display.getlastkey() (on page 7-63) display.sendkey() (on page 7-73) display.settext() (on page 7-76) errorqueue.
PAGE 423
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 7: TSP command reference errorqueue.count This attribute gets the number of entries in the error queue. Type TSP-Link accessible Affected by Where saved Default value Attribute (R) Yes Power cycle Clearing error queue Reading error messages Not applicable Not applicable Usage count = errorqueue.count count The number of entries in the error queue Example Returns the number of entries in the error queue. count = errorqueue.
PAGE 424
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Number Error level Description 0 NO_SEVERITY 10 INFORMATIONAL 20 RECOVERABLE 30 SERIOUS 40 FATAL The message is information only. This level is used when the error queue is empty; the message does not represent an error. The message is information only. This level is used to indicate status changes; the message does not represent an error.
PAGE 425
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 7: TSP command reference Example print(eventlog.all()) Get and print all entries from the event log and remove the entries from the log. Output: 17:26:35.690 10 Oct 2007, LAN0, 192.168.1.102, LXI, 0, 1192037132, 1192037155.733269000, 0, 0x0 17:26:39.009 10 Oct 2007, LAN5, 192.168.1.102, LXI, 0, 1192037133, 1192037159.052777000, 0, 0x0 Also see eventlog.clear() (on page 7-85) eventlog.count (on page 7-86) eventlog.
PAGE 426
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual eventlog.count This attribute returns the number of events in the event log. Type TSP-Link accessible Affected by Where saved Default value Attribute (R) Yes Instrument reset Clearing event log Reading event log Not applicable Not applicable Usage N = eventlog.count The number of events in the event log N Example Displays the present number of events in the instrument event log.
PAGE 427
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 7: TSP command reference Example print(eventlog.enable) eventlog.enable = eventlog.DISABLE print(eventlog.enable) Displays the present status of the Series 2600B event log. Output: 1.00000e+00 0.00000e+00 Also see eventlog.all() (on page 7-84) eventlog.clear() (on page 7-85) eventlog.count (on page 7-86) eventlog.next() (on page 7-87) eventlog.overwritemethod (on page 7-88) eventlog.
PAGE 428
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual eventlog.overwritemethod This attribute controls how the event log processes events if the event log is full. Type TSP-Link accessible Affected by Where saved Default value Attribute (RW) Yes Instrument reset Recall setup Not saved 1 (eventlog.DISCARD_OLDEST) Usage method = eventlog.overwritemethod eventlog.overwritemethod = method method Set to one of the following values: • • 0 or eventlog.
PAGE 429
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 7: TSP command reference fileVar:close() This function closes the file that is represented by the fileVar variable. Type TSP-Link accessible Function No Affected by Where saved Default value Usage fileVar:close() fileVar The file descriptor variable to close Details This command is equivalent to io.close(fileVar). Note that files are automatically closed when the file descriptors are garbage collected.
PAGE 430
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual fileVar:read() This function reads data from a file. Type TSP-Link accessible Function No Affected by Where saved Default value Usage data1 = fileVar:read() data1 = fileVar:read(format1) data1, data2 = fileVar:read(format1, format2) data1, ..., datan = fileVar:read(format1, ..., formatn) data1 data2 datan fileVar format1 format2 formatn ...
PAGE 431
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 7: TSP command reference fileVar:seek() This function sets and gets a file's current position.
PAGE 432
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Details This function may buffer data until a flush (fileVar:flush() or io.flush()) or close (fileVar:close() or io.close()) operation is performed. Also see fileVar:close() (on page 7-89) fileVar:flush() (on page 7-89) io.close() (on page 7-106) io.flush() (on page 7-107) io.open() (on page 7-108) format.
PAGE 433
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 7: TSP command reference format.byteorder This attribute sets the binary byte order for the data that is printed using the printnumber() and printbuffer() functions. Type TSP-Link accessible Affected by Where saved Default value Attribute (RW) Yes Instrument reset Recall setup Not saved 1 (format.LITTLEENDIAN) Usage order = format.byteorder format.
PAGE 434
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual format.data This attribute sets the data format for data that is printed using the printnumber() and printbuffer() functions. Type TSP-Link accessible Affected by Where saved Default value Attribute (RW) No Instrument reset Recall setup Not saved 1 (format.ASCII) Usage value = format.data format.
PAGE 435
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 7: TSP command reference fs.chdir() This function sets the current working directory. Type TSP-Link accessible Function Yes Affected by Where saved Default value Usage workingDirectory = fs.chdir(path) workingDirectory Returned value containing the working path path A string indicating the new working directory path Details The new working directory path may be absolute or relative to the current working directory.
PAGE 436
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Usage status = fs.is_dir(path) status Whether or not the given path is a directory (true or false) path The path of the file system entry to test Details The file system path may be absolute or relative to the current working system path. Also see fs.is_file() (on page 7-96) fs.is_file() Tests whether the specified path refers to a file (as opposed to a directory).
PAGE 437
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 7: TSP command reference fs.readdir() This function returns a list of the file system entries in the directory. Type TSP-Link accessible Function Yes Affected by Where saved Default value Usage files = fs.readdir(path) files path A table containing the names of all the file system entries in the specified directory The directory path Details The directory path may be absolute or relative to the current working directory.
PAGE 438
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual gettimezone() This function retrieves the local time zone. Type TSP-Link accessible Function Yes Affected by Where saved Default value Usage timeZone = gettimezone() timeZone The local timezone of the instrument Details See settimezone() for additional details about the time zone format and a description of the fields.
PAGE 439
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 7: TSP command reference Details Output data includes transconductance values, reading buffer with measured voltages, reading buffer with measured voltages and currents. If all parameters are omitted when this function is called, this function is executed with the parameters set to the default values.
PAGE 440
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Example gm_array = gm_vsweep(smua, 0, 5, 20) SMU A returns Gm values only. gm_array, ibuf = gm_vsweep(smua, 0, 5, 20) SMU A returns Gm and reading buffer with measured currents. gm_array, ibuf, vbuf = gm_vsweep(smua, 0, 5, 20) SMU A returns Gm and reading buffers with measured currents and voltages. Also see gm_isweep() (on page 7-98) KIParlib factory script (on page 5-22) gpib.
PAGE 441
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 7: TSP command reference i_leakage_measure() This KIHighC factory script function performs a current leakage measurement after stepping the output voltage.
PAGE 442
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Also see i_leakage_threshold() (on page 7-102) High-capacitance mode (on page 3-65) KIHighC factory script (on page 5-22) i_leakage_threshold() This KIHighC factory script function measures the current and compares it to a threshold. This continues until either the measured current drops below the threshold or the timeout expires.
PAGE 443
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 7: TSP command reference Example smua.source.highc = smua.ENABLE smua.source.levelv = 5 smua.source.output = smua.OUTPUT_ON delay(1) pass = i_leakage_threshold(smua, 0, 1, 300e-3, 10e-6, 100e-3, 1e-6, 1) Enable high-capacitance mode. Charge the capacitor.
PAGE 444
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Details This function only initiates configured pulse trains assigned to a valid tag. Configure the pulse before initiating it using one of the ConfigurePulse* functions (refer to the Also see section). Example ® smua.reset() smua.source.rangev = 5 smua.source.rangei = 1 smua.source.levelv = 0 smua.measure.rangev = 5 smua.measure.rangei = 1 smua.measure.nplc = 0.01 smua.measure.autozero = smua.
PAGE 445
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 7: TSP command reference Usage f, msg = InitiatePulseTestDual(tag1, tag2) f A Boolean flag; this flag will be true when the pulse was successfully configured, false when errors were encountered msg A string message; if the f flag is false, msg will contain an error message; if it is true, msg will contain a string indicating successful configuration Numeric identifier of the first pulse configuration to be initiated Numeric identifier
PAGE 446
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Example smua.reset() smua.source.rangev = 5 smua.source.rangei = 1 smua.source.levelv = 0 smua.measure.rangev = 5 smua.measure.rangei = 1 smua.measure.nplc = 0.01 smua.measure.autozero = smua.AUTOZERO_ONCE smua.nvbuffer1.clear() smua.nvbuffer1.
PAGE 447
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 7: TSP command reference Usage io.close() io.close(file) file The descriptor of the file to close Details If a file is not specified, the default output file closes. Only io.close(), used without specifying a parameter, can be accessed from a remote node. Example testFile, testError = io.open("testfile.txt", "w") if nil == testError then testFile:write("This is my test file") io.close(testFile) end Opens file testfile.txt for writing.
PAGE 448
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual io.input() This function assigns a previously opened file, or opens a new file, as the default input file. Type TSP-Link accessible Function Yes (see Details) Affected by Where saved Default value Usage fileVar = io.input() fileVar = io.
PAGE 449
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 7: TSP command reference Example testFile, testError = io.open("testfile.txt", "w") if testError == nil then testFile:write("This is my test file") io.close(testFile) end Opens file testfile.txt for writing. If no errors were found while opening, writes "This is my test file" and closes the file. Also see io.close() (on page 7-106) io.
PAGE 450
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Usage data1 = io.read() data1 = io.read(format1) data1, data2 = io.read(format1, format2) data1, ..., dataN = io.read(format1, ...
PAGE 451
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 7: TSP command reference io.write() This function writes data to the default output file. Type TSP-Link accessible Function Yes Affected by Where saved Default value Usage io.write() io.write(data1) io.write(data1, data2) io.write(data1, ..., dataN) data1 data2 dataN ...
PAGE 452
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Example Re-initialize the LAN interface with new settings. lan.applysettings() Also see None lan.autoconnect This attribute is used to enable or disable link monitoring. Type TSP-Link accessible Affected by Where saved Default value Attribute (RW) Yes LAN restore defaults Nonvolatile memory 1 (lan.ENABLE) Usage state = lan.autoconnect lan.autoconnect = state state LAN link monitoring state: 1 or lan.
PAGE 453
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 7: TSP command reference Details This attribute is an array of DNS (domain name system) server addresses. These addresses take priority for DNS lookups and are consulted before any server addresses that are obtained using DHCP. This allows local DNS servers to be specified that take priority over DHCP-configured global DNS servers. You can specify up to two addresses. The address specified by 1 is consulted first for DNS lookups.
PAGE 454
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Also see lan.config.dns.dynamic (on page 7-114) lan.config.dns.hostname (on page 7-114) lan.config.dns.verify (on page 7-115) lan.restoredefaults() (on page 7-121) lan.config.dns.dynamic Enables or disables the dynamic DNS registration. Type TSP-Link accessible Affected by Where saved Default value Attribute (RW) Yes LAN restore defaults Nonvolatile memory 1 (lan.ENABLE) Usage state = lan.config.dns.
PAGE 455
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 7: TSP command reference Details This attribute holds the host name to request during dynamic DNS registration. Dynamic DNS registration works with DHCP to register the host name specified in this attribute with the DNS server.
PAGE 456
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual lan.config.duplex This attribute defines the LAN duplex mode. Type TSP-Link accessible Affected by Where saved Default value Attribute (RW) Yes LAN restore defaults Nonvolatile memory 1 (lan.FULL) Usage duplex = lan.config.duplex lan.config.duplex = duplex duplex LAN duplex setting can be one of the following values: 1 or lan.FULL: Selects full-duplex operation 0 or lan.
PAGE 457
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 7: TSP command reference lan.config.ipaddress This attribute specifies the LAN IP address. Type TSP-Link accessible Affected by Where saved Default value Attribute (RW) Yes LAN restore defaults Nonvolatile memory "192.168.0.2" Usage ipAddress = lan.config.ipaddress lan.config.
PAGE 458
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Example print(lan.config.method) Outputs the current method. For example: 1.00000e+00 Also see lan.restoredefaults() (on page 7-121) lan.config.speed This attribute contains the LAN speed used when restarting in manual configuration mode. Type TSP-Link accessible Affected by Where saved Default value Attribute (RW) Yes LAN restore defaults Nonvolatile memory 100 (100 Mbps) Usage speed = lan.config.
PAGE 459
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 7: TSP command reference Details This attribute specifies the LAN subnet mask that will be used when the manual configuration method is used to configure the LAN. This setting is ignored when DLLA or DHCP is used. This attribute does not indicate the actual setting presently in effect. Use the lan.status.subnetmask attribute to determine the present operating state of the LAN. Example print(lan.config.
PAGE 460
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual lan.lxidomain This attribute contains the LXI domain. Type TSP-Link accessible Affected by Where saved Default value Attribute (RW) Yes LAN restore defaults Nonvolatile memory 0 Usage domain = lan.lxidomain lan.lxidomain = domain domain The LXI domain number (0 to 255) Details This attribute sets the LXI domain number. All outgoing LXI packets will be generated with this domain number.
PAGE 461
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 7: TSP command reference lan.reset() This function resets the LAN interface. Type TSP-Link accessible Function Yes Affected by Where saved Default value Usage lan.reset() Details This function resets the LAN interface. It performs the commands lan.restoredefaults() and lan.applysettings(). Also see lan.applysettings() (on page 7-111) lan.restoredefaults() (on page 7-121) lan.
PAGE 462
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Example Restores the LAN defaults. lan.restoredefaults() Also see lan.reset() (on page 7-121) localnode.password (on page 7-140) lan.status.dns.address[N] This attribute contains the DNS server IP addresses. Type TSP-Link accessible Affected by Where saved Default value Attribute (R) Yes Not applicable Not applicable Not applicable Usage dnsAddress = lan.status.dns.
PAGE 463
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 7: TSP command reference Details A fully qualified domain name (FQDN), sometimes referred to as an absolute domain name, is a domain name that specifies its exact location in the tree hierarchy of the Domain Name System (DNS). A FQDN is the complete domain name for a specific computer or host on the LAN. The FQDN consists of two parts: the host name and the domain name.
PAGE 464
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Example Outputs the gateway address, such as: 192.168.0.1 print(lan.status.gateway) Also see lan.config.gateway (on page 7-116) lan.status.ipaddress This attribute contains the LAN IP address presently in use by the LAN interface. Type TSP-Link accessible Affected by Where saved Default value Attribute (R) Yes Not applicable Not applicable Not applicable Usage ipAddress = lan.status.
PAGE 465
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 7: TSP command reference Also see None lan.status.port.dst This attribute contains the LAN dead socket termination port number. Type TSP-Link accessible Affected by Where saved Default value Attribute (R) Yes Not applicable Not applicable Not applicable Usage port = lan.status.port.
PAGE 466
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual lan.status.port.telnet This attribute contains the LAN Telnet connection port number. Type TSP-Link accessible Affected by Where saved Default value Attribute (R) Yes Not applicable Not applicable Not applicable Usage port = lan.status.port.telnet Telnet port number port Details This attribute holds the TCP port number used to connect to the instrument to control it over a Telnet interface.
PAGE 467
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 7: TSP command reference lan.status.speed This attribute contains the LAN speed. Type TSP-Link accessible Affected by Where saved Default value Attribute (R) Yes Not applicable Not applicable Not applicable Usage speed = lan.status.speed speed LAN speed in Mbps, either 10 or 100 Details This attribute indicates the transmission speed currently in use by the LAN interface.
PAGE 468
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual lan.timedwait This attribute contains the LAN timed-wait state interval. Type TSP-Link accessible Affected by Where saved Default value Attribute (RW) Yes LAN restore defaults Nonvolatile memory 20 (20 s) Usage timeout = lan.timedwait lan.
PAGE 469
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 7: TSP command reference Also see lan.lxidomain (on page 7-120) lan.trigger[N].clear() (on page 7-129) lan.trigger[N].mode (on page 7-133) lan.trigger[N].overrun (on page 7-134) lan.trigger[N].stimulus (on page 7-135) lan.trigger[N].wait() (on page 7-137) Understanding hardware value and pseudo line state (on page 3-51) lan.trigger[N].clear() This function clears the event detector for a trigger.
PAGE 470
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual lan.trigger[N].connect() This function prepares the event generator for outgoing trigger events. Type TSP-Link accessible Function Yes Affected by Where saved Default value Usage lan.trigger[N].connect() The LAN event number (1 to 8) N Details Prepares the event generator to send event messages. For TCP connections, this opens the TCP connection.
PAGE 471
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 7: TSP command reference Details This read-only attribute is set to true when the LAN trigger is connected and ready to send trigger events following a successful lan.trigger[N].connect() command; if the LAN trigger is not ready to send trigger events, this value is false. This attribute is also false when either lan.trigger[N].protocol or lan.trigger[N].ipaddress attributes are changed or the remote connection closes the connection.
PAGE 472
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Details Set the stimulus of any trigger event detector to the value of this constant to have it respond to incoming LAN trigger packets. Example Route occurrences of triggers on LAN trigger 1 to digital I/O trigger 14. digio.trigger[14].stimulus = lan.trigger[1].EVENT_ID Also see None lan.trigger[N].ipaddress This attribute specifies the address (in dotted-decimal format) of UDP or TCP listeners.
PAGE 473
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 7: TSP command reference lan.trigger[N].mode This attribute sets the trigger operation and detection mode of the specified LAN event. Type TSP-Link accessible Affected by Where saved Default value Attribute (RW) Yes Instrument reset LAN trigger N reset Recall setup Not saved 0 (lan.TRIG_EITHER) Usage mode = lan.trigger[N].mode lan.trigger[N].
PAGE 474
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual lan.trigger[N].overrun This attribute contains the event detector's overrun status. Type TSP-Link accessible Affected by Where saved Default value Attribute (R) Yes LAN trigger N clear Not applicable LAN trigger N reset Instrument reset Recall setup Not applicable Usage overrun = lan.trigger[N].
PAGE 475
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 7: TSP command reference Details The LAN trigger listens for trigger messages on all supported protocols, but uses the designated protocol for sending outgoing messages. After changing this setting, lan.trigger[N].connect() must be called before outgoing event messages can be sent. When the lan.MULTICAST protocol is selected, the lan.trigger[N].ipaddress attribute is ignored and event messages are sent to the multicast address 224.0.23.
PAGE 476
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Usage triggerStimulus = lan.trigger[N].stimulus lan.trigger[N].stimulus = triggerStimulus triggerStimulus N The LAN event identifier used to trigger the event A number specifying the trigger packet over the LAN for which to set or query the trigger source (1 to 8) Details This attribute specifies which event causes a LAN trigger packet to be sent for this trigger.
PAGE 477
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 7: TSP command reference Example lan.trigger[5].stimulus = trigger.timer[1].EVENT_ID Use timer 1 trigger event as the source for LAN packet 5 trigger stimulus. Also see lan.trigger[N].assert() (on page 7-128) lan.trigger[N].clear() (on page 7-129) lan.trigger[N].connect() (on page 7-130) lan.trigger[N].overrun (on page 7-134) lan.trigger[N].wait() (on page 7-137) lan.trigger[N].wait() This function waits for an input trigger.
PAGE 478
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Usage flag = localnode.autolinefreq localnode.autolinefreq = flag flag The auto line frequency detection setting: true or false Details Set flag to one of the following values: true: Enable automatic line frequency detection at start-up. false: Disable automatic line frequency detection at start-up.
PAGE 479
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 7: TSP command reference localnode.linefreq This attribute contains the power line frequency setting used for NPLC calculations. Type TSP-Link accessible Affected by Where saved Default value Attribute (RW) Yes Not applicable Nonvolatile memory 60 (60 Hz) Usage frequency = localnode.linefreq localnode.
PAGE 480
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual localnode.model This attribute stores the model number. Type TSP-Link accessible Affected by Where saved Default value Attribute (R) Yes Not applicable Not applicable Not applicable Usage model = localnode.model model The model number of the instrument Details When using this command from a remote node, replace localnode with the node reference, for example, node[5].model.
PAGE 481
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 7: TSP command reference Example localnode.password = "N3wpa55w0rd" Changes the remote interface password to N3wpa55w0rd. Also see lan.reset() (on page 7-121) localnode.passwordmode (on page 7-141) localnode.passwordmode This attribute stores the remote access password enable mode. Type TSP-Link accessible Affected by Where saved Default value Attribute (RW) Yes Not applicable Nonvolatile memory 1 (localnode.
PAGE 482
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Details The command messages do not generate prompts. The instrument generates prompts in response to command messages. When the prompting mode is enabled (set to 1), the instrument generates prompts in response to command messages. There are three prompts that might be generated: • TSP> is the standard prompt. This prompt indicates that everything is normal and the command is done processing.
PAGE 483
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 7: TSP command reference Details When set to 1, the IEEE Std 488.2 common commands generate prompts if prompting is enabled with the localnode.prompts attribute. If set to 1, limit the number of *trg commands sent to a running script to 50 regardless of the setting of the localnode.prompts attribute. When set to 0, IEEE Std 488.2 common commands will not generate prompts. When using the *trg command with a script that executes trigger.
PAGE 484
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Usage revision = localnode.revision revision Firmware revision level Details This attribute indicates the revision number of the firmware that is presently running in the instrument. When using this command from a remote node, localnode should be replaced with the node reference. For example, node[5].revision. Example Outputs the present revision level. Sample output: 3.0.0 print(localnode.
PAGE 485
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 7: TSP command reference localnode.showerrors This attribute sets whether or not the instrument automatically sends generated errors. Type TSP-Link accessible Affected by Where saved Default value Attribute (RW) Yes Power cycle Not saved 0 (disabled) Usage errorMode = localnode.showerrors localnode.
PAGE 486
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Details This function is useful for aliasing attributes to improve execution speed. Calling the function created with makegetter() executes faster than accessing the attribute directly. Creating a getter function is only useful if it is going to be called several times. Otherwise, the overhead of creating the getter function outweighs the overhead of accessing the attribute directly.
PAGE 487
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 7: TSP command reference meminfo() This function returns the present amount of available memory and the total amount of memory in the instrument.
PAGE 488
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual node[N].execute() This function starts test scripts on a remote TSP-Link node. This function is not available on the Models 2604B/2614B/2634B. Type TSP-Link accessible Function Yes (see Details) Affected by Where saved Default value Usage node[N].
PAGE 489
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 7: TSP command reference Details This function retrieves the value of a global variable from the run-time environment of this node. Do not use this command to retrieve the value of a global variable from the local node. Instead, access the global variable directly. This command should only be used from a remote master when controlling this instrument over ® a TSP-Link network. Example print(node[5].
PAGE 490
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual opc() This function sets the operation complete status bit when all overlapped commands are completed. Type TSP-Link accessible Function No Affected by Where saved Default value Usage opc() Details This function causes the operation complete bit in the Standard Event Status Register to be set when all previously started local overlapped commands are complete.
PAGE 491
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 7: TSP command reference os.rename() This function renames an existing file or directory. Type TSP-Link accessible Function Yes Affected by Where saved Default value Usage success, msg = os.
PAGE 492
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Details The timespec is a table using the fields listed in the table below. year month day hour min sec The year (1970 or later) The month (1 to 12) The day (1 to 31) The hour (00 to 23) The minute (00 to 59) The second (00 to 59) If the time (hour, minute, and second) options are not used, they default to noon for that day.
PAGE 493
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 7: TSP command reference Example 1 x = 10 print(x) Example of an output response message: 1.00000e+01 Note that your output might be different if you set your ASCII precision setting to a different value. x = 10 print(tostring(x)) Example of an output response message: 10 Example 2 Also see format.asciiprecision (on page 7-92) printbuffer() This function prints data from tables or reading buffer subtables.
PAGE 494
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual When there are outstanding overlapped commands to acquire data, n refers to the index that the last entry in the table will have after all the readings have completed. If you pass a reading buffer instead of a reading buffer subtable, the default subtable for that reading buffer will be used. This command generates a single response message that contains all data.
PAGE 495
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 7: TSP command reference Example 1 reset() testData = buffer.make(200) smu.measure.count = 6 smu.measure.read(testData) smu.measure.read(defbuffer1) format.data = format.ASCII format.asciiprecision = 6 printbuffer(1, testData.n, testData.readings, testData.units, testData.relativetimestamps) for x = 1, testData.n do printbuffer(x,x,testData, testData.units, testData.
PAGE 496
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual printnumber() This function prints numbers using the configured format. Type TSP-Link accessible Function No Affected by Where saved Default value Usage printnumber(value1) printnumber(value1, value2) printnumber(value1, ..., valueN) value1 value2 valueN First value to print in the configured format Second value to print in the configured format Last value to print in the configured format ...
PAGE 497
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 7: TSP command reference Usage PulseIMeasureV(smu, bias, level, ton, toff, points) ® smu bias level ton toff points System SourceMeter instrument channel (for example, smua refers to SMU channel A) Bias level in amperes Pulse level in amperes Pulse on time in seconds Pulse off time in seconds Number of pulse-measure cycles Details Data for pulsed voltage measurements, current levels, and timestamps are stored in smua.nvbuffer1.
PAGE 498
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Usage PulseVMeasureI(smu, bias, level, ton, toff, points) ® smu bias level ton toff points System SourceMeter instrument channel (for example, smua refers to SMU channel A) Bias level in volts Pulse level in volts Pulse on time in seconds Pulse off time in seconds Number of pulse-measure cycles Details If any parameters are omitted or nil, the operator is prompted to enter them using the front panel.
PAGE 499
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 7: TSP command reference Usage tbl = QueryPulseConfig(tag) tag tbl Numeric identifier to be assigned to the defined pulse train Returned table Details Once a pulse train has been configured and assigned to a tag, it is often desirable to inspect the settings of this preconfigured pulse train. The QueryPulseConfig() command can be used for this purpose.
PAGE 500
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Example Configure channel A to generate a pulse train, query configuration, and then display as a string. Channel A pulses voltage from a bias level of 0 V smua.source.rangev = 5 to a pulse level of 5 V. The pulse level is present smua.source.rangei = 1 for 2 ms, and the bias level for 200 ms with a 1 A smua.source.levelv = 0 limit setting.
PAGE 501
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 7: TSP command reference Details The reset() command in its simplest form resets the entire TSP-enabled system, including the controlling node and all subordinate nodes. If you want to reset a specific instrument, use either the localnode.reset() or node[X].reset() command. Use the localnode.reset() command for the local instrument. Use the node[X].reset() command to reset an instrument on a subordinate node.
PAGE 502
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual script.anonymous This is a reference to the anonymous script. Type TSP-Link accessible Affected by Where saved Default value Attribute (R) No See Details See Details Not applicable Usage scriptVar = script.anonymous scriptVar The name of the variable that references the script Details You can use the script.anonymous script like any other script.
PAGE 503
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 7: TSP command reference script.delete() This function deletes a script from nonvolatile memory. Type TSP-Link accessible Function No Affected by Where saved Default value Usage script.delete(scriptName) scriptName The string that represents the name of the script Example script.delete("test8") Deletes a user script named "test8" from nonvolatile memory.
PAGE 504
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual script.load() This function creates a script from a specified file. Type TSP-Link accessible Function No Affected by Where saved Default value Usage scriptVar = script.load(file) scriptVar = script.
PAGE 505
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 7: TSP command reference script.new() This function creates a script. Type TSP-Link accessible Function No Affected by Where saved Default value Usage scriptVar = script.new(code) scriptVar = script.new(code, name) scriptVar The name of the variable that will reference the script code name A string containing the body of the script The name of the script Details The name parameter is the name that is added to the script.user.
PAGE 506
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual script.newautorun() This function is identical to the script.new() function, but it creates a script with the autorun attribute set to "yes". Type TSP-Link accessible Function No Affected by Where saved Default value Usage scriptVar = script.newautorun(code) scriptVar = script.
PAGE 507
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 7: TSP command reference Details This command copies the script from nonvolatile memory into the run-time environment. It also creates a global variable with the same name as the name of the script. Example Restores a script named "test9" from nonvolatile memory. script.restore("test9") Also see script.delete() (on page 7-163) script.run() This function runs the anonymous script.
PAGE 508
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual script.user.catalog() This function returns an iterator that can be used in a for loop to iterate over all the scripts stored in nonvolatile memory. Type TSP-Link accessible Function No Affected by Where saved Default value Usage for name in script.user.
PAGE 509
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 7: TSP command reference Make sure to save the script in nonvolatile memory after setting the autorun attribute so that the instrument will retain the setting. Example Assume a script named "test5" is in the run-time environment. The next time the instrument is turned on, "test5" script automatically loads and runs. test5.autorun = "yes" test5.save() Also see None scriptVar.list() This function generates a script listing.
PAGE 510
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual scriptVar.name This attribute contains the name of a script in the run-time environment. Type TSP-Link accessible Affected by Where saved Default value Attribute (RW) No Not applicable Not applicable Not applicable Usage scriptVar.name = scriptName scriptName = scriptVar.
PAGE 511
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 7: TSP command reference scriptVar.run() This function runs a script. Type TSP-Link accessible Function No Affected by Where saved Default value Usage scriptVar.run() scriptVar() scriptVar The name of the variable that references the script Details The scriptVar.run() function runs the script referenced by scriptVar. You can also run the script by using scriptVar(). To run a factory script, use script.factory.scripts.
PAGE 512
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual scriptVar.save() This function saves the script to nonvolatile memory or to a USB flash drive. Type TSP-Link accessible Function No Affected by Where saved Default value Usage scriptVar.save() scriptVar.save(filename) scriptVar The name of variable that references the script filename The file name to use when saving the script to a USB flash drive Details The scriptVar.
PAGE 513
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 7: TSP command reference Details The loadscript or loadandrunscript and endscript keywords are not included in the source code. The body of the script is a single string with lines separated by the new line character. The instrument automatically stores the source for all scripts that are loaded on the instrument. To free up memory or to obfuscate the code, assign nil to the source attribute of the script.
PAGE 514
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual serial.databits This attribute configures character width (data bits) for the RS-232 port. Type TSP-Link accessible Affected by Where saved Default value Attribute (RW) Yes Not applicable Nonvolatile memory 8 Usage bits = serial.databits serial.
PAGE 515
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 7: TSP command reference Details A new flow control setting takes effect when the command to change it is processed. Allow ample time for the command to be processed before attempting to communicate with the instrument again. If possible, set the flow control from one of the other command interfaces or from the front panel. The reset function has no effect on flow control. Example serial.flowcontrol = serial.
PAGE 516
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Also see RS-232 interface operation (on page 2-108) serial.baud (on page 7-173) serial.databits (on page 7-174) serial.flowcontrol (on page 7-174) serial.read() This function reads available characters (data) from the serial port. Type TSP-Link accessible Function Yes Affected by Where saved Default value Usage data = serial.
PAGE 517
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 7: TSP command reference Details This function writes the specified string to the serial port, where it can be read by connected equipment (for example, a component handler). No terminator characters are added to the data, and data is written exactly as specified by the data parameter. Example serial.write("1 2 3 4") Write data string "1 2 3 4" to the serial port. Also see serial.
PAGE 518
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual settimezone() This function sets the local time zone.
PAGE 519
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 7: TSP command reference Example settimezone("8", "1", "3.3.0/02", "11.2.0/02") settimezone(offset) Sets offset to equal +8 hours, +1 hour for DST, starts on Mar 14 at 2:00 a.m, ends on Nov 7 at 2:00 a.m. Sets local time zone to offset. Also see gettimezone() (on page 7-98) os.time() (on page 7-151) settime() (on page 7-177) setup.poweron This attribute specifies which saved setup to recall when the instrument is turned on.
PAGE 520
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual setup.recall() This function recalls settings from a saved setup. Type TSP-Link accessible Function Yes Affected by Where saved Default value Usage setup.
PAGE 521
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 7: TSP command reference setup.save() This function saves the present setup as a user-saved setup. Type TSP-Link accessible Function Yes Affected by Where saved Default value Usage setup.
PAGE 522
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Example Terminates all overlapped operations on SMU channel A. smua.abort() Also see smuX.measure.overlappedY() (on page 7-209) smuX.trigger.initiate() (on page 7-240) smuX.buffer.getstats() This function returns a specified reading buffer's statistics. Type TSP-Link accessible Function Yes Affected by Where saved Default value Usage statistics = smuX.buffer.
PAGE 523
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 7: TSP command reference If n equals zero (0), all other attributes are nil. If n equals 1, the stddev attribute is nil because the standard deviation of a sample size of 1 is undefined. The min and max entries each have the attributes defined in the following table.
PAGE 524
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual smuX.cal.adjustdate This attribute stores the date of the last calibration adjustment. Type TSP-Link accessible Affected by Where saved Default value Attribute (RW) Yes SMU cal. restore SMU nonvolatile memory Initially set to factory calibration date Usage adjustDate = smuX.cal.adjustdate smuX.cal.
PAGE 525
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 7: TSP command reference Usage calDate = smuX.cal.date smuX.cal.date = calDate calDate X The calibration date of the active calibration set Source-measure unit (SMU) channel (for example, smua.cal.date applies to SMU channel A) Details This attribute stores the calibration date that is associated with the active calibration set.
PAGE 526
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Details This attribute stores the calibration due date associated with the active calibration set. The calibration due date can be read at any time but can only be assigned a new value when calibration has been enabled with the smuX.cal.unlock() function. It is typically set to the date when the next calibration should be performed. This attribute is stored with the active calibration set.
PAGE 527
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 7: TSP command reference smuX.cal.password This attribute stores the password required to enable calibration. Type TSP-Link accessible Affected by Where saved Default value Attribute (W) Yes Not applicable SMU nonvolatile memory "KI0026XX" Usage smuX.cal.password = newPassword X newPassword SMU channel (for example, smua.cal.
PAGE 528
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Details This attribute controls which polarity calibration constants are used to make all subsequent measurements. This attribute does not affect the smuX.measure.calibrateY() or smuX.source.calibrateY() commands. The polarity for those commands is dictated by the range parameter that is given to the command.
PAGE 529
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 7: TSP command reference Example Restores factory calibration constants for SMU channel A. smua.cal.restore() Also see Adjustment (on page B-18) smuX.cal.lock() (on page 7-186) smuX.cal.unlock() (on page 7-190) smuX.cal.save() This function stores the active calibration constants to nonvolatile memory. Type TSP-Link accessible Function Yes Affected by Where saved Default value Usage smuX.cal.
PAGE 530
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Usage calState = smuX.cal.state calState X The present calibration state; when reading this attribute, calState has one of the following values: 0 or smuX.CALSTATE_LOCKED: Calibration is locked 1 or smuX.CALSTATE_CALIBRATING: The calibration constants or dates have been changed but not yet saved to nonvolatile memory 2 or smuX.
PAGE 531
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 7: TSP command reference Also see Adjustment (on page B-18) smuX.cal.lock() (on page 7-186) smuX.cal.password (on page 7-187) smuX.cal.state (on page 7-189) smuX.contact.calibratehi() This function calibrates the high/sense high contact check measurement. This function is not available on the Models 2604B/2614B/2634B. Type TSP-Link accessible Function Yes Affected by Where saved Default value Usage smuX.contact.
PAGE 532
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Also see Adjustment (on page B-18) smuX.cal.restore() (on page 7-188) smuX.cal.save() (on page 7-189) smuX.cal.unlock() (on page 7-190) smuX.contact.calibratelo() (on page 7-192) smuX.contact.calibratelo() This function calibrates the low/sense low contact check measurement. This function is not available on the Models 2604B/2614B/2634B.
PAGE 533
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 7: TSP command reference Example -- Short SENSE LO and LO terminals -- Short SENSE HI and HI terminals -- Allow readings to settle, then get measurements r0_hi, r0_lo = smua.contact.r() Performs contact check on SMU channel A. -- Connect 50 OHM resistor between SENSE LO and LO -- Connect 50 OHM resistor between SENSE HI and HI -- Allow readings to settle, then get measurements r50_hi, r50_lo = smua.contact.
PAGE 534
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Details This function returns true if the contact resistance is below the threshold; this function returns false if it is above the threshold. The threshold value is set by the smuX.contact.threshold attribute. If you attempt to perform a contact check measurement when any of the following conditions exist, an error is generated.
PAGE 535
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 7: TSP command reference Details If you attempt to perform a contact resistance measurement when any of the following conditions exist, an error will be generated.
PAGE 536
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Details This setting controls the aperture of measurements made for contact check. It does not affect the smuX.measure.nplc aperture setting. The speed setting can have a dramatic effect on the accuracy of the measurement (see specifications). Example Configure contact check for higher accuracy on SMU channel A. smua.contact.speed = smua.
PAGE 537
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 7: TSP command reference smuX.makebuffer() This function creates a reading buffer. Type TSP-Link accessible Function Yes Affected by Where saved Default value Usage bufferVar = smuX.makebuffer(bufferSize) bufferVar X bufferSize The created reading buffer Source-measure unit (SMU) channel (for example, smua.
PAGE 538
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual smuX.measure.analogfilter This attribute controls the use of an analog filter when measuring on the lowest current ranges. This attribute is available on the Models 2634B/2635B/2636B only. Type TSP-Link accessible Affected by Where saved Default value Attribute (RW) Yes Instrument reset SMU reset Recall setup Not saved 1 (filter on) Usage option = smuX.measure.analogfilter smuX.measure.
PAGE 539
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 7: TSP command reference Details This attribute indicates the measurement autorange state. Its value is smuX.AUTORANGE_OFF when the SMU measure circuit is on a fixed range and smuX.AUTORANGE_ON when it is in autorange mode. Setting this attribute to smuX.AUTORANGE_OFF puts the SMU on a fixed range. The fixed range is the present SMU measure range. Setting this attribute to smuX.AUTORANGE_ON puts the SMU measure circuit in autorange mode.
PAGE 540
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Details The analog-to-digital converter (ADC) uses a ratiometric A/D conversion technique. To ensure the accuracy of readings, the instrument must periodically obtain new measurements of its internal ground and voltage reference. The time interval between updates to these reference measurements is determined by the integration aperture being used for measurements.
PAGE 541
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 7: TSP command reference Details This function generates and activates new calibration constants for the given range. The positive and negative polarities of the instrument must be calibrated separately. Use a positive value for range to calibrate the positive polarity and a negative value for range to calibrate the negative polarity.
PAGE 542
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Details This attribute controls the number of measurements taken any time a measurement is requested. When using a reading buffer with a measure command, this attribute also controls the number of readings to be stored. If smuX.measure.count is set to a value greater than 1, any measurement delay set by smuX.measure.delay will only occur before the first measurement, while the smuX.measure.
PAGE 543
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 7: TSP command reference Also see Measure auto delay (on page 2-83) reset() (on page 7-160) smuX.measure.count (on page 7-201) smuX.measure.delayfactor (on page 7-203) smuX.source.delay (see "
PAGE 544
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Usage filterCount = smuX.measure.filter.count smuX.measure.filter.count = filterCount filterCount X The number of readings required for each filtered measurement (1 to 100) Source-measure unit (SMU) channel (for example, smua.measure.filter.count applies to SMU channel A) Details This attribute sets the size of the stack used for filtered measurements. Example smua.measure.filter.
PAGE 545
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 7: TSP command reference Also see Filters (on page 3-3) reset() (on page 7-160) setup.recall() (on page 7-180) smuX.measure.filter.count (on page 7-203) smuX.measure.filter.type (on page 7-205) smuX.reset() (on page 7-216) smuX.measure.filter.type This command sets the type of filter used for measurements when the measurement filter is enabled.
PAGE 546
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual smuX.measure.highcrangedelayfactor This attribute contains a delay multiplier that is only used during range changes when the high-capacitance mode is active. Type TSP-Link accessible Affected by Where saved Default value Attribute (RW) Yes Instrument reset SMU reset Recall setup Saved setup 10 Usage delayFactor = smuX.measure.highcrangedelayfactor smuX.measure.
PAGE 547
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 7: TSP command reference Details This attribute sets the time interval between measurements when smuX.measure.count is set to a value greater than 1. The SMU attempts to start each measurement when scheduled. If the SMU cannot keep up with the interval setting, measurements are made as quickly as possible.
PAGE 548
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Also see Range (on page 2-82) reset() (on page 7-160) setup.recall() (on page 7-180) smuX.measure.autorangeY (on page 7-198) smuX.reset() (on page 7-216) smuX.measure.nplc This command sets the integration aperture for measurements. Type TSP-Link accessible Affected by Where saved Default value Attribute (RW) Yes Instrument reset SMU reset Recall setup Saved setup 1.0 Usage nplc = smuX.measure.
PAGE 549
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 7: TSP command reference smuX.measure.overlappedY() This function starts an asynchronous (background) measurement. Type TSP-Link accessible Function No Affected by Where saved Default value Usage smuX.measure.overlappedY(rbuffer) smuX.measure.overlappediv(ibuffer, vbuffer) X Source-measure unit (SMU) channel (for example, smua.measure.
PAGE 550
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual smuX.measure.rangeY This attribute contains the positive full-scale value of the measurement range for voltage or current.
PAGE 551
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 7: TSP command reference Also see Range (on page 2-82) reset() (on page 7-160) setup.recall() (on page 7-180) smuX.measure.autorangeY (on page 7-198) smuX.reset() (on page 7-216) smuX.source.rangeY (on page 7-230) smuX.measure.rel.enableY This attribute turns relative measurements on or off.
PAGE 552
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual smuX.measure.rel.levelY This attribute sets the offset value for relative measurements. Type TSP-Link accessible Affected by Where saved Default value Attribute (RW) Yes Instrument reset SMU reset Recall setup Not saved 0 Usage relValue = smuX.measure.rel.levelY smuX.measure.rel.levelY = relValue relValue X Y Relative measurement offset value Source-measure unit (SMU) channel (for example, smua.
PAGE 553
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 7: TSP command reference smuX.measure.Y() This function makes one or more measurements. Type TSP-Link accessible Function Yes Affected by Where saved Default value Usage reading = reading = iReading, iReading, iReading, smuX.measure.Y() smuX.measure.Y(readingBuffer) vReading = smuX.measure.iv() vReading = smuX.measure.iv(iReadingBuffer) vReading = smuX.measure.
PAGE 554
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Also see Reading buffers (on page 3-6) smuX.measure.count (on page 7-201) smuX.measure.overlappedY() (on page 7-209) smuX.nvbufferY (on page 7-215) smuX.measureYandstep() This function performs one or two measurements and then steps the source. Type TSP-Link accessible Function Yes Affected by Where saved Default value Usage reading = smuX.measureYandstep(sourceValue) iReading, vReading = smuX.
PAGE 555
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 7: TSP command reference Also see smuX.measure.autorangeY (on page 7-198) smuX.measure.Y() (on page 7-213) smuX.source.autorangeY (on page 7-217) smuX.trigger.source.limitY (on page 7-247) smuX.trigger.source.linearY() (on page 7-248) smuX.trigger.source.listY() (on page 7-249) smuX.trigger.source.logY() (on page 7-250) Sweep Operation (on page 3-20) smuX.nvbufferY This attribute contains a dedicated reading buffer.
PAGE 556
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual smuX.reset() This function turns off the output and resets the commands that begin with smu. to their default settings. Type TSP-Link accessible Function Yes Affected by Where saved Default value Usage smuX.reset() X Source-measure unit (SMU) channel (for example, smua.reset() applies to SMU channel A) Details This function turns off the output and returns the specified SMU to its default settings.
PAGE 557
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 7: TSP command reference smuX.sense This attribute contains the state of the sense mode. Type TSP-Link accessible Affected by Where saved Default value Attribute (RW) Yes SMU reset Instrument reset Recall setup Saved setup 0 (smuX.SENSE_LOCAL) Usage senseMode = smuX.sense smuX.sense = senseMode senseMode The sense mode; set to one of the following: 0 or smuX.SENSE_LOCAL: Selects local sense (2-wire) 1 or smuX.
PAGE 558
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Usage sourceAutorange = smuX.source.autorangeY smuX.source.autorangeY = sourceAutorange sourceAutorange The state of the source autorange control. Set to one of the following: 0 or smuX.AUTORANGE_OFF: Disables source autorange 1 or smuX.AUTORANGE_ON: Enables source autorange X Source-measure unit (SMU) channel (for example, smua.source.
PAGE 559
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 7: TSP command reference Details This function generates and activates new calibration constants for the given range. The positive and negative polarities of the source must be calibrated separately. Use a positive value for range to calibrate the positive polarity and a negative value for range to calibrate the negative polarity. Do not use 0.0 for a negative calibration point; 0.0 is considered to be a positive number.
PAGE 560
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Details This read-only attribute contains the source compliance state (true or false). • true indicates that the limit function is in control of the source (source in compliance). • false indicates that the source function is in control of the output (source not in compliance). Writing to this attribute generates an error.
PAGE 561
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 7: TSP command reference Example Sets the delay for SMU channel A to automatic (a range-dependent delay is inserted whenever the source is changed). smua.source.delay = smua.DELAY_AUTO Also see reset() (on page 7-160) smuX.measure.count (on page 7-201) smuX.measure.delay (on page 7-202) smuX.reset() (on page 7-216) smuX.source.func This attribute contains the source function, which can be voltage or current.
PAGE 562
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Usage highC = smuX.source.highc smuX.source.highc = highC highC The state of the high-capacitance mode; set to one of the following values: 0 or smuX.DISABLE: Disables high-capacitance mode 1 or smuX.ENABLE: Enables high-capacitance mode X Source-measure unit (SMU) channel (for example, smua.source.
PAGE 563
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 7: TSP command reference Details This attribute configures the output level of the voltage or current source. If the source is configured as a voltage source and the output is on, the new smuX.source.levelv setting is sourced immediately. If the output is off or the source is configured as a current source, the voltage level is sourced when the source is configured as a voltage source and the output is turned on.
PAGE 564
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Details Use the smuX.source.limiti attribute to limit the current output of the voltage source. Use smuX.source.limitv to limit the voltage output of the current source. The SMU always uses autoranging for the limit setting. Use the smuX.source.limitp attribute to limit the output power of the source. This attribute should be set in the test sequence before the turning the source on.
PAGE 565
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 7: TSP command reference Details This attribute is used with source autoranging to put a lower bound on the range that is used. Lower ranges generally require greater settling times. If you set a low-range value, you might be able to source small values with less settling time.
PAGE 566
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Also see Output-off states (on page 2-77) smuX.source.offlimitY (on page 7-226) smuX.source.offmode (on page 7-226) smuX.source.output (on page 7-228) smuX.source.offlimitY This attribute sets the limit (current or voltage) used when the source-measure unit (SMU) is in normal output-off mode.
PAGE 567
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 7: TSP command reference Usage sourceOffMode = smuX.source.offmode smuX.source.offmode = sourceOffMode sourceOffMode The output-off setting; set to one of the following values: 0 or smuX.OUTPUT_NORMAL: Configures the source function according to smuX.source.offfunc attribute 1 or smuX.OUTPUT_ZERO: Configures source to output 0 V as smuX.OUTPUT_NORMAL with different compliance handling (see the Details below) 2 or smuX.
PAGE 568
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual smuX.source.output This attribute sets the source output state (on or off). Type TSP-Link accessible Affected by Where saved Default value Attribute (RW) Yes SMU reset Instrument reset Recall setup Not saved 0 (smuX.OUTPUT_OFF) Usage sourceOutput = smuX.source.output smuX.source.output = sourceOutput sourceOutput The source's output state setting; set to one of the following values: 0 or smuX.
PAGE 569
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 7: TSP command reference Usage outputAction = smuX.source.outputenableaction smuX.source.outputenableaction = outputAction outputAction X The output enable action of the source; set to one of the following values: 0 or smuX.OE_NONE: No action 1 or smuX.OE_OUTPUT_OFF: Turns the source output off Source-measure unit (SMU) channel (for example, smua.source.
PAGE 570
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual smuX.source.rangeY This attribute contains the source range.
PAGE 571
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 7: TSP command reference smuX.source.settling This attribute contains the source settling mode. Type TSP-Link accessible Affected by Where saved Default value Attribute (RW) Yes SMU reset Instrument reset Recall setup Not saved 0 (smuX.SETTLE_SMOOTH) Usage settleOption = smuX.source.settling smuX.source.settling = settleOption settleOption Set to the source settling mode. Set to one of the following values: 0 or smuX.
PAGE 572
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Usage sinkMode = smuX.source.sink smuX.source.sink = sinkMode sinkMode Sets the sink mode on or off; set to one of the following values: 0 or smuX.DISABLE: Turns off sink mode 1 or smuX.ENABLE: Turns on sink mode X Source-measure unit (SMU) channel (for example, smua.source.sink applies to SMU channel A) Details This attribute enables or disables sink mode.
PAGE 573
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 7: TSP command reference smuX.trigger.arm.set() This function sets the arm event detector to the detected state. Type TSP-Link accessible Function Yes Affected by Where saved Default value Usage smuX.trigger.arm.set() X Source-measure unit (SMU) channel (for example, smua.trigger.arm.set() applies to SMU channel A) Details The SMU will automatically clear all the event detectors when the smuX.trigger.
PAGE 574
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Details Set this attribute to the event ID of any trigger event generator to wait for that event. Set this attribute to zero to bypass waiting for events at the arm event detector (the SMU continues uninterrupted through the remote trigger model). Set eventID to one of the existing trigger event IDs shown in the following table. Trigger event IDs* Event ID** Event description smuX.trigger.
PAGE 575
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 7: TSP command reference smuX.trigger.ARMED_EVENT_ID This constant contains the armed event number. Type TSP-Link accessible Constant Yes Affected by Where saved Default value Usage eventID = smuX.trigger.ARMED_EVENT_ID eventID X The armed event number Source-measure unit (SMU) channel (for example, smua.trigger.
PAGE 576
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Also see Triggering (on page 3-32) smuX.trigger.count This attribute sets the trigger count in the trigger model. Type TSP-Link accessible Affected by Where saved Default value Attribute (RW) Yes SMU reset Instrument reset Recall setup Not saved 1 Usage triggerCount = smuX.trigger.count smuX.trigger.
PAGE 577
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 7: TSP command reference Example Configure the end pulse action to achieve a pulse and configure trigger timer 1 to control the end of pulse. smua.trigger.endpulse.action = smua.SOURCE_IDLE smua.trigger.endpulse.stimulus = trigger.timer[1].EVENT_ID Also see Triggering (on page 3-32) smuX.trigger.endpulse.set() This function sets the end pulse event detector to the detected state.
PAGE 578
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Details Set this attribute to the event ID of any trigger event generator to wait for that event. To bypass waiting for an event, set this attribute's value to 0. Set eventID to one of the existing trigger event IDs, which are shown in the following table. Trigger event IDs* Event ID** Event description smuX.trigger.
PAGE 579
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 7: TSP command reference smuX.trigger.endsweep.action This attribute sets the action of the source at the end of a sweep. Type TSP-Link accessible Affected by Where saved Default value Attribute (RW) Yes SMU reset Instrument reset Recall setup Not saved 0 (smuX.SOURCE_IDLE) Usage action = smuX.trigger.endsweep.action smuX.trigger.endsweep.
PAGE 580
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Example trigger.timer[1].stimulus = smua.trigger.IDLE_EVENT_ID Trigger timer 1 when the SMU returns to the idle layer. Also see Triggering (on page 3-32) smuX.trigger.initiate() This function initiates a sweep operation. Type TSP-Link accessible Function Yes Affected by Where saved Default value Usage smuX.trigger.initiate() X Source-measure unit (SMU) channel (for example, smua.trigger.
PAGE 581
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 7: TSP command reference smuX.trigger.measure.action This attribute controls measurement actions during a sweep. Type TSP-Link accessible Affected by Where saved Default value Attribute (RW) Yes SMU reset Instrument reset Recall setup Not saved 0 (smuX.DISABLE) Usage action = smuX.trigger.measure.action smuX.trigger.measure.action = action The sweep measurement action; set to one of the following values: 0 or smuX.
PAGE 582
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Details This function is useful whenever you want the SMU to continue operation without waiting for a programmed trigger event. When called, this function immediately satisfies the event detector, allowing the SMU to continue through the trigger model.
PAGE 583
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 7: TSP command reference Details Set this attribute to the event ID of any trigger event generator to wait for that event. When set, the SMU waits for the event at the measurement event detector portion of the trigger model. Set this attribute to zero to bypass waiting for an event (the SMU continues uninterrupted through the remote trigger model). Set eventID to one of the existing trigger event IDs shown in the following table.
PAGE 584
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual smuX.trigger.measure.Y() This function configures the measurements that are to be made in a subsequent sweep. Type TSP-Link accessible Function Yes Affected by Where saved Default value Usage smuX.trigger.measure.Y(rbuffer) smuX.trigger.measure.iv(ibuffer, vbuffer) X Y rbuffer ibuffer vbuffer Source-measure unit (SMU) channel (for example, smua.trigger.measure.
PAGE 585
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 7: TSP command reference Usage eventID = smuX.trigger.MEASURE_COMPLETE_EVENT_ID eventID X The measurement complete event number Source-measure unit (SMU) channel (for example, smua.trigger.MEASURE_COMPLETE_EVENT_ID applies to SMU channel A) Details Set the stimulus of any trigger object to the value of this constant to have the trigger object respond to measure complete events from this SMU. Also see Triggering (on page 3-32) smuX.
PAGE 586
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual smuX.trigger.source.action This attribute enables or disables sweeping the source (on or off). Type TSP-Link accessible Affected by Where saved Default value Attribute (RW) Yes SMU reset Instrument reset Recall setup Not saved 0 (smuX.DISABLE) Usage action = smuX.trigger.source.action smuX.trigger.source.action = action action X Sweep source action. Set to one of the following values: 0 or smuX.
PAGE 587
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 7: TSP command reference smuX.trigger.source.limitY This attribute sets the sweep source limit. Type TSP-Link accessible Affected by Where saved Default value Attribute (RW) Yes SMU reset Instrument reset Recall setup Not saved 0 (smuX.LIMIT_AUTO) Usage sweepSourceLimit = smuX.trigger.source.limitY smuX.trigger.source.
PAGE 588
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual smuX.trigger.source.linearY() This function configures a linear source sweep. Type TSP-Link accessible Function Yes Affected by Where saved Default value Usage smuX.trigger.source.linearY(startValue, endValue, points) X Source-measure unit (SMU) channel (for example, smua.trigger.source.
PAGE 589
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 7: TSP command reference smuX.trigger.source.listY() This function configures an array-based source sweep. Type TSP-Link accessible Function Yes Affected by Where saved Default value Usage smuX.trigger.source.listY(sweepList) X Source-measure unit (SMU) channel (for example, smua.trigger.source.
PAGE 590
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual smuX.trigger.source.logY() This function configures an exponential (geometric) source sweep. Type TSP-Link accessible Function Yes Affected by Where saved Default value Usage smuX.trigger.source.logY(startValue, endValue, points, asymptote) X Source-measure unit (SMU) channel (for example, smua.trigger.source.
PAGE 591
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 7: TSP command reference Also see smuX.trigger.source.action (on page 7-246) smuX.trigger.source.linearY() (on page 7-248) smuX.trigger.source.listY() (on page 7-249) Sweep operation (on page 3-20) smuX.trigger.source.set() This function sets the source event detector to the detected state. Type TSP-Link accessible Function Yes Affected by Where saved Default value Usage smuX.trigger.source.
PAGE 592
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Details Set this attribute to the event ID of any trigger event generator to wait for that event. When set, the SMU waits for the event at the source event detector portion of the trigger model. To bypass waiting for an event, set this attribute's value to zero (0). Set eventID to one of the existing trigger event IDs shown in the following table. Trigger event IDs* Event ID** Event description smuX.trigger.
PAGE 593
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 7: TSP command reference smuX.trigger.SOURCE_COMPLETE_EVENT_ID This constant contains the source complete event number. Type TSP-Link accessible Constant Yes Affected by Where saved Default value Usage eventID = smuX.trigger.SOURCE_COMPLETE_EVENT_ID eventID X The source action complete event number Source-measure unit (SMU) channel (for example, smua.trigger.
PAGE 594
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Usage eventID = smuX.trigger.SWEEPING_EVENT_ID The sweeping event number Source-measure unit (SMU) channel (for example, smua.trigger.SWEEPING_EVENT_ID applies to SMU channel A) eventID X Details Set the stimulus of any trigger object to the value of this constant to have the trigger object respond to sweeping events from this SMU. Also see Triggering (on page 3-32) status.
PAGE 595
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 7: TSP command reference The individual bits of this register have the following meanings: Bit Value Description B0 status.MEASUREMENT_SUMMARY_BIT status.MSB Set summary bit indicates that an enabled measurement event has occurred. Bit B0 decimal value: 1 B1 status.SYSTEM_SUMMARY_BIT status.SSB B2 status.ERROR_AVAILABLE status.EAV This bit is only available on Models 2601B/2602B/2611B/2612B/2635B/2636B.
PAGE 596
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Also see Status byte and service request (SRQ) (on page E-15) status.measurement.* This attribute contains the measurement event register set. Type TSP-Link accessible Affected by Where saved Default value Attribute -- -- -- -- .condition (R) Yes Not applicable Not saved Not applicable .enable (RW) Yes Status reset Not saved 0 .event (R) Yes Status reset Not saved 0 .
PAGE 597
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 7: TSP command reference Bit Value Description B0 status.measurement.VOLTAGE_LIMIT status.measurement.VLMT B1 status.measurement.CURRENT_LIMIT status.measurement.ILMT B2-B6 B7 Not used status.measurement.READING_OVERFLOW status.measurement.ROF Set bit is a summary of the status.measurement.voltage_limit register. Bit B0 decimal value: 1 Set bit is a summary of the status.measurement.current_limit register.
PAGE 598
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual status.measurement.buffer_available.* This attribute contains the measurement event buffer available summary register set. Type TSP-Link accessible Affected by Where saved Default value Attribute -- -- -- -- .condition (R) Yes Not applicable Not saved Not applicable .enable (RW) Yes Status reset Not saved 0 .event (R) Yes Status reset Not saved 0 .
PAGE 599
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 7: TSP command reference As an example, to set bit B1 of the measurement event buffer available summary enable register, set status.measurement.buffer_available.enable = status.measurement.buffer_available.SMUA. In addition to the above constants, measurementRegister can be set to the decimal equivalent of the bit to set. To set more than one bit of the register, set measurementRegister to the sum of their decimal weights.
PAGE 600
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Bit Value Description B0 B1 Not used status.measurement.current_limit.SMUA Not applicable. Set bit indicates that the SMU A current limit was exceeded. Bit B1 decimal value: 2 Binary value: 0000 0010 B2 status.measurement.current_limit.SMUB B3-B15 Not used This bit is only available on Models 2602B/2604B/2612B/2614B/2634B/2636B. Set bit indicates that the SMU B current limit was exceeded.
PAGE 601
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual measurementRegister Section 7: TSP command reference The status of the measurement event instrument summary register; a zero (0) indicates no bits set (also send 0 to clear all bits); other values indicate various bit settings Details These attributes are used to read or write to the measurement event instrument summary registers. Reading a status register returns a value.
PAGE 602
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual status.measurement.instrument.smuX.* This attribute contains the registers of the measurement event SMU X summary register set. Type TSP-Link accessible Affected by Where saved Default value Attribute -- -- -- -- .condition (R) Yes Not applicable Not saved Not applicable .enable (RW) Yes Status reset Not saved 0 .event (R) Yes Status reset Not saved 0 .
PAGE 603
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 7: TSP command reference For information about .condition, .enable, .event, .ntr, and .ptr registers, refer to Status register set contents (on page E-1) and Enable and transition registers (on page E-19). The individual bits of this register are defined in the following table. Bit Value Description B0* status.measurement.instrument.smuX.VOLTAGE_LIMIT status.measurement.instrument.smuX.VLMT B1* status.measurement.instrument.smuX.
PAGE 604
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual status.measurement.reading_overflow.* This attribute contains the measurement event reading overflow summary register set. Type TSP-Link accessible Affected by Where saved Default value Attribute -- -- -- -- .condition (R) Yes Not applicable Not saved Not applicable .enable (RW) Yes Status reset Not saved 0 .event (R) Yes Status reset Not saved 0 .
PAGE 605
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 7: TSP command reference As an example, to set bit B1 of the measurement event reading overflow summary enable register, set status.measurement.reading_overflow.enable = status.measurement.reading_overflow.SMUA. In addition to the above constants, measurementRegister can be set to the numeric equivalent of the bit to set. To set more than one bit of the register, set measurementRegister to the sum of their decimal weights.
PAGE 606
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Bit Value Description B0 B1 Not used status.measurement.voltage_limit.SMUA B2 status.measurement.voltage_limit.SMUB B3-B15 Not used Not applicable. Set bit indicates the enabled VLMT bit for the SMU A measurement register is set. Bit B1 decimal value: 2 Binary value: 0000 0010 This bit is only available on Models 2602B/2604B/2612B/2614B/2634B/2636B.
PAGE 607
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 7: TSP command reference Details This attribute is used to read or write to the system node enable register. Reading the system node enable register returns a value. The binary equivalent of the value indicates which register bits are set. In the binary equivalent, the least significant bit is bit B0, and the most significant bit is bit B7. For example, assume the value of 1.
PAGE 608
Section 7: TSP command reference Bit Binary value Decimal Weights Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual B7 0/1 128 7 (2 ) B6 0/1 64 6 (2 ) B5 0/1 32 B4 0/1 16 5 B3 0/1 8 4 (2 ) B2 0/1 4 3 (2 ) 2 (2 ) (2 ) B1 0/1 2 1 (2 ) B0 0/1 1 0 (2 ) Example 1 nodeEnableRegister = status.MSB + status.OSB status.node_enable = nodeEnableRegister Sets the MSB and OSB bits of the system node enable register using constants.
PAGE 609
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 7: TSP command reference Bit Value Description B0 status.MEASUREMENT_SUMMARY_BIT status.MSB B1 B2 Not used status.ERROR_AVAILABLE status.EAV B3 status.QUESTIONABLE_SUMMARY_BIT status.QSB B4 status.MESSAGE_AVAILABLE status.MAV B5 status.EVENT_SUMMARY_BIT status.ESB B6 status.MASTER_SUMMARY_STATUS status.MSS B7 status.OPERATION_SUMMARY_BIT status.OSB Set summary bit indicates that an enabled measurement event has occurred.
PAGE 610
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual status.operation.* These attributes manage the operation status register set of the status model. Type TSP-Link accessible Affected by Where saved Default value Attribute -- -- -- -- .condition (R) Yes Not applicable Not saved Not applicable .enable (RW) Yes Status reset Not saved 0 .event (R) Yes Status reset Not saved 0 .ntr (RW) Yes Status reset Not saved 0 .
PAGE 611
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 7: TSP command reference Bit Value Description B0 status.operation.CALIBRATING status.operation.CAL B1-B2 B3 Not used status.operation.SWEEPING status.operation.SWE B4 status.operation.MEASURING status.operation.MEAS Set bit indicates that the summary bit of the status.operation.calibrating register has been set. Bit B0 decimal value: 1 Not applicable Set bit indicates that the summary bit from the status.operation.
PAGE 612
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Also see Operation Status Registers (on page E-9) status.operation.calibrating.* This attribute contains the operation status calibration summary register set. Type TSP-Link accessible Affected by Where saved Default value Attribute -- -- -- -- .condition (R) Yes Not applicable Not saved Not applicable .enable (RW) Yes Status reset Not saved 0 .event (R) Yes Status reset Not saved 0 .
PAGE 613
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 7: TSP command reference Example Sets the SMUA bit of the operation status calibration summary enable register using a constant. status.operation.calibrating.enable = status.operation.calibrating.SMUA Also see Operation Status Registers (on page E-9) status.operation.* (on page 7-270) status.operation.instrument.* This attribute contains the operation status instrument summary register set.
PAGE 614
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual For information about .condition, .enable, .event, .ntr, and .ptr registers, refer to Status register set contents (on page E-1) and Enable and transition registers (on page E-19). The individual bits of this register are defined in the following table. Bit Value Description B0 B1 Not used status.operation.instrument.SMUA B2 status.operation.instrument.SMUB B3-B9 B10 Not used status.operation.instrument.
PAGE 615
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Bit Binary value B15 0/1 Decimal Weights 32,768 B14 0/1 16,384 15 14 (2 ) (2 ) Section 7: TSP command reference B13 0/1 B12 0/1 8,192 4,096 13 12 (2 ) (2 ) B11 0/1 B10 0/1 2,048 11 1,024 10 (2 ) (2 ) B9 0/1 512 9 (2 ) B8 0/1 256 8 (2 ) Example 1 operationRegister = status.operation.instrument.SMUA + status.operation.instrument.TRGBLND status.operation.instrument.
PAGE 616
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Details These attributes are used to read or write to the operation status digital I/O summary registers. Reading a status register returns a value. The binary equivalent of the returned value indicates which register bits are set. The least significant bit of the binary number is bit B0, and the most significant bit is bit B15. For information about .condition, .enable, .event, .ntr, and .
PAGE 617
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 7: TSP command reference Usage operationRegister = status.operation.instrument.digio.trigger_overrun.condition operationRegister = status.operation.instrument.digio.trigger_overrun.enable operationRegister = status.operation.instrument.digio.trigger_overrun.event operationRegister = status.operation.instrument.digio.trigger_overrun.ntr operationRegister = status.operation.instrument.digio.trigger_overrun.ptr status.operation.instrument.
PAGE 618
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual As an example, to set bit B1 of the operation status digital I/O overrun enable register, set status.operation.instrument.digio.trigger_overrun.enable = status.operation.instrument.digio.trigger_overrun.LINE1. In addition to the above constants, operationRegister can be set to the numeric equivalent of the bit to set.
PAGE 619
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 7: TSP command reference Details These attributes are used to read or write to the operation status LAN summary registers. The binary equivalent of the value indicates which register bits are set. In the binary equivalent, the least significant bit is bit B0, and the most significant bit is bit B15. For example, if a value of 1.
PAGE 620
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Bit Binary value Decimal Weights B7 0/1 128 B6 0/1 64 (2 ) (2 ) (2 ) (2 ) (2 ) (2 ) (2 ) (2 ) Bit Binary value B15 0/1 B14 0/1 B13 0/1 B12 0/1 B11 0/1 B10 0/1 B9 0/1 B8 0/1 Decimal Weights 32,768 16,384 8,192 4,096 2,048 1,024 512 256 7 6 15 14 (2 ) (2 ) B5 0/1 32 B4 0/1 16 5 4 13 12 (2 ) (2 ) B3 0/1 8 B2 0/1 4 3 2 11 10 (2 ) (2 ) B1 0/1 2 1 9 (2 ) B0 0/1 1 0
PAGE 621
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual B15 ** 0 B14 > 0 B13 > 0 B12 > 0 B11 > 0 B10 > 0 B9 > 0 B8 > 1 Section 7: TSP command reference B7 > 0 B6 > 0 B5 > 0 B4 > 0 B3 > 0 B2 > 0 B1 > 1 B0 * 0 * Least significant bit ** Most significant bit A set bit indicates that the specified LAN trigger generated an action overrun when triggered to generate a trigger packet. For information about .condition, .enable, .event, .ntr, and .
PAGE 622
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual status.operation.instrument.smuX.* This attribute contains the operation status SMU X summary register set. Type TSP-Link accessible Affected by Where saved Default value Attribute -- -- -- -- .condition (R) Yes Not applicable Not saved Not applicable .enable (RW) Yes Status reset Not saved 0 .event (R) Yes Status reset Not saved 0 .ntr (RW) Yes Status reset Not saved 0 .
PAGE 623
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 7: TSP command reference Bit Value Description B0 status.operation.instrument.smuX.CALIBRATING status.operation.instrument.smuX.CAL B1-B2 B3 Not used status.operation.instrument.smuX.SWEEPING status.operation.instrument.smuX.SWE B4 status.operation.instrument.smuX.MEASURING status.operation.instrument.smuX.MEAS B5-B9 B10 Not used status.operation.instrument.smuX.TRIGGER_OVERRUN status.operation.instrument.smuX.
PAGE 624
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual status.operation.instrument.smuX.trigger_overrrun.* This attribute contains the operation status SMU X trigger overrun register set. Type TSP-Link accessible Affected by Where saved Default value Attribute -- -- -- -- .condition (R) Yes Not applicable Not saved Not applicable .enable (RW) Yes Status reset Not saved 0 .event (R) Yes Status reset Not saved 0 .
PAGE 625
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 7: TSP command reference Bit Value Description B0 B1 Not used status.operation.instrument.smuX.trigger_overrun.ARM B2 status.operation.instrument.smuX.trigger_overrun.SRC B3 status.operation.instrument.smuX.trigger_overrun.MEAS B4 status.operation.instrument.smuX.trigger_overrun.ENDP B5-B15 Not used Not applicable.
PAGE 626
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual status.operation.instrument.trigger_blender.* This attribute contains the operation status trigger blender summary register set. Type TSP-Link accessible Affected by Where saved Default value Attribute -- -- -- -- .condition (R) Yes Not applicable Not saved Not applicable .enable (RW) Yes Status reset Not saved 0 .event (R) Yes Status reset Not saved 0 .
PAGE 627
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 7: TSP command reference In addition to the above constants, operationRegister can be set to the numeric equivalent of the bit to set. For example, to set bit B10, set operationRegister to 1024. Example status.operation.instrument.trigger_blender.enable = 1024 Uses a decimal value to set the TRGOVR bit of the operation status trigger blender summary enable. Also see Operation Status Registers (on page E-9) status.operation.instrument.
PAGE 628
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Details These attributes are used to read or write to the operation status trigger blender overrun registers. Reading a status register returns a value. The binary equivalent of the returned value indicates which register bits are set. The least significant bit of the binary number is bit B0, and the most significant bit is bit B15.
PAGE 629
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual B6 0/1 64 Section 7: TSP command reference Bit Binary value Decimal Weights B7 0/1 128 (2 ) (2 ) (2 ) (2 ) (2 ) (2 ) (2 ) (2 ) Bit Binary value B15 0/1 B14 0/1 B13 0/1 B12 0/1 B11 0/1 B10 0/1 B9 0/1 B8 0/1 Decimal Weights 32,768 16,384 8,192 4,096 2,048 1,024 512 256 7 6 15 14 (2 ) (2 ) B5 0/1 32 B4 0/1 16 5 4 13 12 (2 ) (2 ) B3 0/1 8 B2 0/1 4 3 2 11 10 (2 ) (2 ) B1 0/1 2 1 9 (2 ) B0 0/1 1 0
PAGE 630
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Details These attributes are used to read or write to the operation status trigger timer summary registers. Reading a status register returns a value. The binary equivalent of the returned value indicates which register bits are set. The least significant bit of the binary number is bit B0, and the most significant bit is bit B15. For information about .condition, .enable, .event, .ntr, and .
PAGE 631
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 7: TSP command reference status.operation.instrument.trigger_timer.trigger_overrun.* This attribute contains the operation status trigger timer overrun register set. Type TSP-Link accessible Affected by Where saved Default value Attribute -- -- -- -- .condition (R) Yes Not applicable Not saved Not applicable .enable (RW) Yes Status reset Not saved 0 .event (R) Yes Status reset Not saved 0 .
PAGE 632
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual A set bit indicates the specified timer generated an action overrun because it was still processing a delay from a previous trigger when a new trigger was received. For information about .condition, .enable, .event, .ntr, and .ptr registers, refer to Status register set contents (on page E-1) and Enable and transition registers (on page E-19).
PAGE 633
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 7: TSP command reference Also see Operation Status Registers (on page E-9) status.operation.instrument.trigger_timer.* (on page 7-289) status.operation.instrument.tsplink.* This attribute contains the operation status TSP-Link summary register set. This attribute is not available on the Models 2604B/2614B/2634B. Type TSP-Link accessible Affected by Where saved Default value Attribute -- -- -- -- .
PAGE 634
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual In addition to the above constants, operationRegister can be set to the numeric equivalent of the bit to set. For example, to set bit B10, set operationRegister to 1024. Example Uses a decimal value to set the trigger overrun bit of the operation status TSP-Link summary enable register. status.operation.instrument.tsplink.enable = 1024 Also see Operation Status Registers (on page E-9) status.operation.
PAGE 635
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 7: TSP command reference A set bit indicates that the specified line generated an action overrun when triggered to generate an output trigger. For information about .condition, .enable, .event, .ntr, and .ptr registers, refer to Status register set contents (on page E-1) and Enable and transition registers (on page E-19). The individual bits of this register are defined in the following table.
PAGE 636
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual status.operation.measuring.* This attribute contains the operation status measuring summary register set. Type TSP-Link accessible Affected by Where saved Default value Attribute -- -- -- -- .condition (R) Yes Not applicable Not saved Not applicable .enable (RW) Yes Status reset Not saved 0 .event (R) Yes Status reset Not saved 0 .ntr (RW) Yes Status reset Not saved 0 .
PAGE 637
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 7: TSP command reference As an example, to set bit B1 of the operation status measuring summary enable register, set status.operation.measuring.enable = status.operation.measuring.SMUA. In addition to the above constants, operationRegister can be set to the numeric equivalent of the bit to set. To set more than one bit of the register, set operationRegister to the sum of their decimal weights.
PAGE 638
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Details These attributes are used to read or write to the operation status remote summary registers. Reading a status register returns a value. The binary equivalent of the returned value indicates which register bits are set. The least significant bit of the binary number is bit B0, and the most significant bit is bit B15. For information about .condition, .enable, .event, .ntr, and .
PAGE 639
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 7: TSP command reference Usage operationRegister = status.operation.sweeping.condition operationRegister = status.operation.sweeping.enable operationRegister = status.operation.sweeping.event operationRegister = status.operation.sweeping.ntr operationRegister = status.operation.sweeping.ptr status.operation.sweeping.enable = operationRegister status.operation.sweeping.ntr = operationRegister status.operation.sweeping.
PAGE 640
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual status.operation.trigger_overrun.* This attribute contains the operation status trigger overrun summary register set. Type TSP-Link accessible Affected by Where saved Default value Attribute -- -- -- -- .condition (R) Yes Not applicable Not saved Not applicable .enable (RW) Yes Status reset Not saved 0 .event (R) Yes Status reset Not saved 0 .ntr (RW) Yes Status reset Not saved 0 .
PAGE 641
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 7: TSP command reference Bit Value Description B0 B1 Not used status.operation.trigger_overrun.SMUA B2 status.operation.trigger_overrun.SMUB B3-B9 B10 Not used status.operation.trigger_overrun.TRIGGER_BLENDER status.operation.trigger_overrun.TRGBLND B11 status.operation.trigger_overrun.TRIGGER_TIMER status.operation.trigger_overrun.TRGTMR B12 status.operation.trigger_overrun.DIGITAL_IO status.operation.trigger_overrun.
PAGE 642
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Bit Binary value Decimal Weights B7 0/1 128 B6 0/1 64 (2 ) (2 ) (2 ) (2 ) (2 ) (2 ) (2 ) (2 ) Bit Binary value B15 0/1 B14 0/1 B13 0/1 B12 0/1 B11 0/1 B10 0/1 B9 0/1 B8 0/1 Decimal Weights 32,768 16,384 8,192 4,096 2,048 1,024 512 256 7 6 15 14 (2 ) (2 ) B5 0/1 32 B4 0/1 16 5 4 13 12 (2 ) (2 ) B3 0/1 8 B2 0/1 4 3 B1 0/1 2 2 11 1 10 (2 ) 9 (2 ) (2 ) B0 0/1 1 0
PAGE 643
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual B15 ** 0 B14 > 0 B13 > 0 B12 > 0 B11 > 0 B10 > 0 B9 > 0 B8 > 0 Section 7: TSP command reference B7 > 1 B6 > 0 B5 > 0 B4 > 0 B3 > 0 B2 > 0 B1 > 0 B0 * 1 * Least significant bit ** Most significant bit For information about .condition, .enable, .event, .ntr, and .ptr registers, refer to Status register set contents (on page E-1) and Enable and transition registers (on page E-19).
PAGE 644
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Also see Operation Status Register (on page E-9) status.operation.* (on page 7-270) status.questionable.* These attributes manage the status model's questionable status register set. Type TSP-Link accessible Affected by Where saved Default value Attribute -- -- -- -- .condition (R) Yes Not applicable Not saved Not applicable .enable (RW) Yes Status reset Not saved 0 .
PAGE 645
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 7: TSP command reference Bit Value Description B0-B7 B8 Not used status.questionable.CALIBRATION status.questionable.CAL B9 status.questionable.UNSTABLE_OUTPUT status.questionable.UO B10-B11 B12 Not used status.questionable.OVER_TEMPERATURE status.questionable.OTEMP B13 status.questionable.INSTRUMENT_SUMMARY status.questionable.
PAGE 646
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual status.questionable.calibration.* This attribute contains the questionable status calibration summary register set. Type TSP-Link accessible Affected by Where saved Default value Attribute -- -- -- -- .condition (R) Yes Not applicable Not saved Not applicable .enable (RW) Yes Status reset Not saved 0 .event (R) Yes Status reset Not saved 0 .ntr (RW) Yes Status reset Not saved 0 .
PAGE 647
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 7: TSP command reference As an example, to set bit B1 of the questionable status calibration summary enable register, set status.questionable.calibration.enable = status.questionable.calibration.SMUA. In addition to the above constants, questionableRegister can be set to the numeric equivalent of the bit to set. To set more than one bit of the register, set operationRegister to the sum of their decimal weights.
PAGE 648
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Details These attributes are used to read or write to the questionable status instrument summary registers. Reading a status register returns a value. The binary equivalent of the returned value indicates which register bits are set. The least significant bit of the binary number is bit B0, and the most significant bit is bit B15. For information about .condition, .enable, .event, .ntr, and .
PAGE 649
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 7: TSP command reference Usage questionableRegister = status.questionable.instrument.smuX.condition questionableRegister = status.questionable.instrument.smuX.enable questionableRegister = status.questionable.instrument.smuX.event questionableRegister = status.questionable.instrument.smuX.ntr questionableRegister = status.questionable.instrument.smuX.ptr status.questionable.instrument.smuX.enable = questionableRegister status.
PAGE 650
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual As an example, to set bit B8 of the questionable status SMU A summary enable register, set status.questionable.instrument.smua.enable = status.questionable.instrument.smua.CAL. In addition to the above constants, questionableRegister can be set to the numeric equivalent of the bit to set. To set more than one bit of the register, set questionableRegister to the sum of their decimal weights.
PAGE 651
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 7: TSP command reference Usage questionableRegister = status.questionable.over_temperature.condition questionableRegister = status.questionable.over_temperature.enable questionableRegister = status.questionable.over_temperature.event questionableRegister = status.questionable.over_temperature.ntr questionableRegister = status.questionable.over_temperature.ptr status.questionable.over_temperature.enable = questionableRegister status.
PAGE 652
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual status.questionable.unstable_output.* This attribute contains the questionable status unstable output summary register set. Type TSP-Link accessible Affected by Where saved Default value Attribute -- -- -- -- .condition (R) Yes Not applicable Not saved Not applicable .enable (RW) Yes Status reset Not saved 0 .event (R) Yes Status reset Not saved 0 .
PAGE 653
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 7: TSP command reference As an example, to set bit B1 of the questionable status unstable output summary enable register, set status.questionable.instrument.enable = status.questionable.instrument.SMUA. In addition to the above constants, questionableRegister can be set to the numeric equivalent of the bit to set. To set more than one bit of the register, set operationRegister to the sum of their decimal weights.
PAGE 654
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual For information about .condition, .enable, .event, .ntr, and .ptr registers, refer to Status register set contents (on page E-1) and Enable and transition registers (on page E-19). The individual bits of this register are defined in the following table. Bit Value Description B0 status.MEASUREMENT_SUMMARY_BIT status.MSB B1 status.SYSTEM_SUMMARY_BIT status.SSB B2 status.ERROR_AVAILABLE status.
PAGE 655
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 7: TSP command reference status.request_event This attribute stores the service request (SRQ) event register. Type TSP-Link accessible Affected by Where saved Default value Attribute (R) Yes Not applicable Not saved 0 Usage requestSRQEventRegister = status.
PAGE 656
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual For information about .condition, .enable, .event, .ntr, and .ptr registers, refer to Status register set contents (on page E-1) and Enable and transition registers (on page E-19). The individual bits of this register are defined in the following table. Bit Value Description B0 status.MEASUREMENT_SUMMARY_BIT status.MSB B1 status.SYSTEM_SUMMARY_BIT status.SSB B2 status.ERROR_AVAILABLE status.
PAGE 657
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 7: TSP command reference status.reset() This function resets all bits in the status model. Type TSP-Link accessible Function Yes Affected by Where saved Default value Usage status.reset() Details This function clears all status data structure registers (enable, event, NTR, and PTR) to their default values. For information about .condition, .enable, .event, .ntr, and .
PAGE 658
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Details These attributes are used to read or write to the standard event status registers. Reading a status register returns a value. The binary equivalent of the returned value indicates which register bits are set. The least significant bit of the binary number is bit B0, and the most significant bit is bit B15. For example, if a value of 1.
PAGE 659
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 7: TSP command reference As an example, to set bit B0 of the standard event status enable register, set status.standard.enable = status.standard.OPC. In addition to the above constants, standardRegister can be set to the numeric equivalent of the bit to set. To set more than one bit of the register, set standardRegister to the sum of their decimal weights.
PAGE 660
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Details In an expanded system (TSP-Link), these attributes are used to read or write to the system summary registers. They are set using a constant or a numeric value, but are returned as a numeric value. The binary equivalent of the value indicates which register bits are set. In the binary equivalent, the least significant bit is bit B0, and the most significant bit is bit B15. For example, if a value of 1.
PAGE 661
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual B6 0/1 64 Section 7: TSP command reference Bit Binary value Decimal Weights B7 0/1 128 (2 ) (2 ) (2 ) (2 ) (2 ) (2 ) (2 ) (2 ) Bit Binary value Decimal Weights B15 0/1 32,768 B14 0/1 16,384 B13 0/1 8,192 B12 0/1 4,096 B11 0/1 2,048 B10 0/1 1,024 B9 0/1 512 B8 0/1 256 7 6 15 14 (2 ) (2 ) B5 0/1 32 B4 0/1 16 5 4 13 12 (2 ) (2 ) B3 0/1 8 B2 0/1 4 3 2 11 10 (2 ) (2 ) B1 0/1 2 1 9 (2 ) B0 0/1 1 0 8 (2 )
PAGE 662
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Details In an expanded system (TSP-Link), these attributes are used to read or write to the system summary registers. They are set using a constant or a numeric value, but are returned as a numeric value. The binary equivalent of the value indicates which register bits are set. In the binary equivalent, the least significant bit is bit B0, and the most significant bit is bit B15. For example, if a value of 1.
PAGE 663
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual B6 0/1 64 Section 7: TSP command reference Bit Binary value Decimal Weights B7 0/1 128 (2 ) (2 ) (2 ) (2 ) (2 ) (2 ) (2 ) (2 ) Bit Binary value Decimal Weights B15 0/1 32,768 B14 0/1 16,384 B13 0/1 8,192 B12 0/1 4,096 B11 0/1 2,048 B10 0/1 1,024 B9 0/1 512 B8 0/1 256 7 6 15 14 (2 ) (2 ) B5 0/1 32 B4 0/1 16 5 4 13 12 (2 ) (2 ) B3 0/1 8 B2 0/1 4 3 2 11 10 (2 ) (2 ) B1 0/1 2 1 9 (2 ) B0 0/1 1 0 8 (2 )
PAGE 664
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Details In an expanded system (TSP-Link), these attributes are used to read or write to the system summary registers. They are set using a constant or a numeric value, but are returned as a numeric value. The binary equivalent of the value indicates which register bits are set. In the binary equivalent, the least significant bit is bit B0, and the most significant bit is bit B15. For example, if a value of 1.
PAGE 665
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual B6 0/1 64 Section 7: TSP command reference Bit Binary value Decimal Weights B7 0/1 128 (2 ) (2 ) (2 ) (2 ) (2 ) (2 ) (2 ) (2 ) Bit Binary value Decimal Weights B15 0/1 32,768 B14 0/1 16,384 B13 0/1 8,192 B12 0/1 4,096 B11 0/1 2,048 B10 0/1 1,024 B9 0/1 512 B8 0/1 256 7 6 15 14 (2 ) (2 ) B5 0/1 32 B4 0/1 16 5 4 13 12 (2 ) (2 ) B3 0/1 8 B2 0/1 4 3 2 11 10 (2 ) (2 ) B1 0/1 2 1 9 (2 ) B0 0/1 1 0 8 (2 )
PAGE 666
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Details In an expanded system (TSP-Link), these attributes are used to read or write to the system summary registers. They are set using a constant or a numeric value, but are returned as a numeric value. The binary equivalent of the value indicates which register bits are set. In the binary equivalent, the least significant bit is bit B0, and the most significant bit is bit B15. For example, if a value of 1.
PAGE 667
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual B6 0/1 64 Section 7: TSP command reference Bit Binary value Decimal Weights B7 0/1 128 (2 ) (2 ) (2 ) (2 ) (2 ) (2 ) (2 ) (2 ) Bit Binary value Decimal Weights B15 0/1 32,768 B14 0/1 16,384 B13 0/1 8,192 B12 0/1 4,096 B11 0/1 2,048 B10 0/1 1,024 B9 0/1 512 B8 0/1 256 7 6 15 14 (2 ) (2 ) B5 0/1 32 B4 0/1 16 5 4 13 12 (2 ) (2 ) B3 0/1 8 B2 0/1 4 3 2 11 10 (2 ) (2 ) B1 0/1 2 1 9 (2 ) B0 0/1 1 0 8 (2 )
PAGE 668
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Details In an expanded system (TSP-Link), these attributes are used to read or write to the system summary registers. They are set using a constant or a numeric value, but are returned as a numeric value. The binary equivalent of the value indicates which register bits are set. In the binary equivalent, the least significant bit is bit B0, and the most significant bit is bit B15. For example, if a value of 1.
PAGE 669
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 7: TSP command reference Example 2 -- decimal 18 = binary 0000 0000 0001 0010 enableRegister = 18 status.system5.enable = enableRegister Uses a decimal value to set bits B1 and B4 of the system summary 5 enable register. Also see status.system4.
PAGE 670
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Example SweepILinMeasureV(smua, -1E-3, 1E-3, 0, 100) This function performs a 100-point linear current sweep starting at −1 mA and stopping at +1 mA. Voltage is measured at every step (point) in the sweep. Because stime is set for 0 s, voltage is measured as quickly as possible after each current step.
PAGE 671
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 7: TSP command reference SweepILogMeasureV() This KISweep factory script function performs a logarithmic current sweep with voltage measured at every step (point).
PAGE 672
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Example This function performs a five-point linear current sweep starting at 10 mA and stopping at 100 mA. Voltage is measured at every step (point) in the sweep. The source is allowed to settle on each step for 1 ms before a measurement is performed. SweepILogMeasureV(smua, 0.01, 0.1, 0.
PAGE 673
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 7: TSP command reference Figure 138: SweepVLinMeasureI() Example SweepVLinMeasureI(smua, -1, 1, 1E-3, 1000) This function performs a 1000-point linear voltage sweep starting at -1 V and stopping at +1 V. Current is measured at every step (point) in the sweep after a 1 ms source settling period.
PAGE 674
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Example myvlist = {-0.1, 0.1, -1, 1, -6, 6, -40, 40, 0, 0} SweepVListMeasureI(smua, myvlist, 500E-3, 10) This function performs a 10-point voltage list sweep starting at the first point in myvlist. Current is measured at every step (point) in the sweep. The source will be allowed to settle on each step for 500 ms before a measurement is performed.
PAGE 675
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 7: TSP command reference Figure 139: SweepVLogMeasureI() Example SweepVLogMeasureI(smua, 1, 10, 0.001, 5) This function performs a five-point logarithmic voltage sweep starting at 1 V and stopping at 10 V. Current is measured at every step (point) in the sweep after a 1 ms source settling period.
PAGE 676
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Example 2 beeper.beep(0.5, 2400) print("reset timer") timer.reset() delay(0.5) dt = timer.measure.t() print("timer after delay:", dt) beeper.beep(0.5, 2400) Sets the beeper, resets the timer, sets a delay, then verifies the time of the delay before the next beeper. Output: reset timer timer after delay: 5.00e-01 Also see timer.reset() (on page 7-336) timer.
PAGE 677
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 7: TSP command reference Example Clears the event detector for blender 2. trigger.blender[2].clear() Also see None trigger.blender[N].EVENT_ID This constant contains the trigger blender event number. Type TSP-Link accessible Constant Yes Affected by Where saved Default value Usage eventID = trigger.blender[N].
PAGE 678
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Details This command selects whether the blender waits for any one event (the “OR” mode) or waits for all selected events (the “AND” mode) before signaling an output event. Example trigger.blender[1].orenable = true Generate a trigger blender 1 trigger.blender[1].stimulus[1] = digio.trigger[3].EVENT_ID event when a digital I/O trigger.blender[1].stimulus[2] = digio.trigger[5].
PAGE 679
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 7: TSP command reference trigger.blender[N].reset() This function resets some of the trigger blender settings to their factory defaults. Type TSP-Link accessible Function Yes Affected by Where saved Default value Usage trigger.blender[N].reset() The trigger event blender (1 to 6) N Details The trigger.blender[N].reset() function resets the following attributes to their factory defaults: • trigger.blender[N].
PAGE 680
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual The eventID parameter may be one of the existing trigger event IDs shown in the following table. Trigger event IDs* Event ID** Event description smuX.trigger.SWEEPING_EVENT_ID Occurs when the source-measure unit (SMU) transitions from the idle state to the arm layer of the trigger model Occurs when the SMU moves from the arm layer to the trigger layer of the trigger model smuX.trigger.ARMED_EVENT_ID smuX.
PAGE 681
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 7: TSP command reference trigger.blender[N].wait() This function waits for a blender trigger event to occur. Type TSP-Link accessible Function Yes Affected by Where saved Default value Usage triggered = trigger.blender[N].
PAGE 682
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual trigger.clear() This function clears the command interface trigger event detector. Type TSP-Link accessible Function No Affected by Where saved Default value Usage trigger.clear() Details The trigger event detector indicates if a trigger event has been detected since the last trigger.wait() call. trigger.clear() clears the trigger event detector and discards the history of command interface trigger events.
PAGE 683
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 7: TSP command reference trigger.generator[N].assert() This function generates a trigger event. Type TSP-Link accessible Function Yes Affected by Where saved Default value Usage trigger.generator[N].assert() The generator number (1 or 2) N Details Use this function to directly trigger events from the command interface or a script (for example, you can trigger a sweep while the instrument is under script control).
PAGE 684
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual trigger.timer[N].clear() This function clears the timer event detector and overrun indicator for the specified trigger timer number. Type TSP-Link accessible Function Yes Affected by Where saved Default value Usage trigger.timer[N].clear() Trigger timer number to clear (1 to 8) N Details This command sets the timer event detector to the undetected state and resets the overrun indicator.
PAGE 685
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 7: TSP command reference trigger.timer[N].delay This attribute sets and reads the timer delay. Type TSP-Link accessible Affected by Where saved Default value Attribute (RW) Yes Instrument reset Recall setup Trigger timer N reset Not saved 10e-6 (10 µs) Usage interval = trigger.timer[N].delay trigger.timer[N].delay = interval interval N Delay interval in seconds (1.
PAGE 686
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Example trigger.timer[3].delaylist = {50e-6, 100e-6, 150e-6} DelayList = trigger.timer[3].delaylist for x = 1, table.getn(DelayList) do print(DelayList[x]) end Set a delay list on trigger timer 3 with three delays (50 µs, 100 µs, and 150 µs). Read the delay list on trigger timer 3. Output (assuming the delay list was set to 50 µs, 100 µs, and 150 µs): 5.000000000e-05 1.000000000e-04 1.
PAGE 687
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 7: TSP command reference Usage overrun = trigger.timer[N].overrun overrun N Trigger overrun state Trigger timer number (1 to 8) Details This attribute indicates if an event was ignored because the event detector was already in the detected state when the event occurred. This is an indication of the state of the event detector built into the timer itself.
PAGE 688
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual trigger.timer[N].reset() This function resets some of the trigger timer settings to their factory defaults. Type TSP-Link accessible Function Yes Affected by Where saved Default value Usage trigger.timer[N].reset() Trigger timer number (1 to 8) N Details The trigger.timer[N].reset() function resets the following attributes to their factory defaults: • trigger.timer[N].count • trigger.timer[N].
PAGE 689
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 7: TSP command reference Details The eventID parameter may be one of the trigger event IDs shown in the following table. Trigger event IDs* Event ID** Event description smuX.trigger.SWEEPING_EVENT_ID Occurs when the source-measure unit (SMU) transitions from the idle state to the arm layer of the trigger model Occurs when the SMU moves from the arm layer to the trigger layer of the trigger model smuX.trigger.ARMED_EVENT_ID smuX.
PAGE 690
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual trigger.timer[N].wait() This function waits for a trigger. Type TSP-Link accessible Function Yes Affected by Where saved Default value Usage triggered = trigger.timer[N].wait(timeout) triggered N timeout Trigger detection indication Trigger timer number (1 to 8) Maximum amount of time in seconds to wait for the trigger Details If one or more trigger events were detected since the last time trigger.
PAGE 691
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 7: TSP command reference Details This function waits up to timeout seconds for a trigger on the active command interface.
PAGE 692
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual tsplink.master This attribute reads the node number assigned to the master node. This attribute is not available on the Models 2604B/2614B/2634B. Type TSP-Link accessible Affected by Where saved Default value Attribute (R) Yes Not applicable Not applicable Not applicable Usage masterNodeNumber = tsplink.
PAGE 693
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 7: TSP command reference tsplink.readbit() This function reads the state of a TSP-Link synchronization line. This function is not available on the Models 2604B/2614B/2634B. Type TSP-Link accessible Function Yes Affected by Where saved Default value Usage data = tsplink.
PAGE 694
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Example Reads state of all three TSP-Link lines. Assuming line 2 is set high, the output is: 2.000000e+00 (binary 010) The format of the output may vary depending on the ASCII precision setting. data = tsplink.readport() print(data) Also see TSP-Link synchronization lines (on page 3-90) tsplink.readbit() (on page 7-353) tsplink.writebit() (on page 7-364) tsplink.readbit() (on page 7-353) tsplink.
PAGE 695
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 7: TSP command reference Details This function erases all information regarding other nodes connected on the TSP-Link system and regenerates the system configuration. This function must be called at least once before any remote nodes can be accessed. If the node number for any instrument is changed, the TSP-Link must be reset again.
PAGE 696
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual tsplink.trigger[N].assert() This function simulates the occurrence of the trigger and generates the corresponding event ID. This function is not available on the Models 2604B/2614B/2634B. Type TSP-Link accessible Function Yes Affected by Where saved Default value Usage tsplink.trigger[N].assert() The trigger line (1 to 3) N Details The set pulse width determines how long the trigger is asserted.
PAGE 697
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 7: TSP command reference Example tsplink.trigger[2].clear() Clears trigger event on synchronization line 2. Also see tsplink.trigger[N].mode (on page 7-358) tsplink.trigger[N].overrun (on page 7-359) tsplink.trigger[N].release() (on page 7-360) tsplink.trigger[N].stimulus (on page 7-362) tsplink.trigger[N].wait() (on page 7-364) tsplink.trigger[N].EVENT_ID This constant identifies the number that is used for the trigger events.
PAGE 698
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual tsplink.trigger[N].mode This attribute defines the trigger operation and detection mode. This attribute is not available on the Models 2604B/2614B/2634B. Type TSP-Link accessible Affected by Where saved Default value Attribute (RW) Yes Instrument reset Recall setup TSP-Link trigger N reset Not saved 0 (tsplink.TRIG_BYPASS) Usage mode = tsplink.trigger[N].mode tsplink.trigger[N].
PAGE 699
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 7: TSP command reference When programmed to any mode except tsplink.TRIG_BYPASS, the output state of the I/O line is controlled by the trigger logic, and the user-specified output state of the line is ignored. When the trigger mode is set to tsplink.TRIG_RISING, the user-specified output state of the line is examined. If the output state selected when the mode is changed is high, the actual mode used will be tsplink.TRIG_RISINGA.
PAGE 700
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Example If an event was ignored, displays true; if an event was not ignored, displays false. print(tsplink.trigger[1].overrun) Also see tsplink.trigger[N].assert() (on page 7-356) tsplink.trigger[N].clear() (on page 7-356) tsplink.trigger[N].mode (on page 7-358) tsplink.trigger[N].release() (on page 7-360) tsplink.trigger[N].reset() (on page 7-361) tsplink.trigger[N].stimulus (on page 7-362) tsplink.trigger[N].
PAGE 701
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 7: TSP command reference Details Releases a trigger that was asserted with an indefinite pulse width. It also releases a trigger that was latched in response to receiving a synchronous mode trigger. Example tsplink.trigger[3].release() Releases trigger line 3. Also see tsplink.trigger[N].assert() (on page 7-356) tsplink.trigger[N].clear() (on page 7-356) tsplink.trigger[N].mode (on page 7-358) tsplink.trigger[N].
PAGE 702
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual tsplink.trigger[N].stimulus This attribute specifies the event that causes the synchronization line to assert a trigger. This attribute is not available on the Models 2604B/2614B/2634B. Type TSP-Link accessible Affected by Where saved Default value Attribute (RW) Yes Instrument reset Recall setup TSP-Link trigger N reset Not saved 0 Usage eventID = tsplink.trigger[N].stimulus tsplink.trigger[N].
PAGE 703
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 7: TSP command reference The eventID parameter may be one of the existing trigger event IDs shown in the following table. Trigger event IDs* Event ID** Event description smuX.trigger.SWEEPING_EVENT_ID Occurs when the source-measure unit (SMU) transitions from the idle state to the arm layer of the trigger model Occurs when the SMU moves from the arm layer to the trigger layer of the trigger model smuX.trigger.ARMED_EVENT_ID smuX.
PAGE 704
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual tsplink.trigger[N].wait() This function waits for a trigger. This function is not available on the Models 2604B/2614B/2634B. Type TSP-Link accessible Function Yes Affected by Where saved Default value Usage triggered = tsplink.trigger[N].
PAGE 705
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 7: TSP command reference Details Use tsplink.writebit() and tsplink.writeport() to control the output state of the trigger line when trigger operation is set to tsplink.TRIG_BYPASS. If the output line is write-protected by the tsplink.writeprotect attribute, this command is ignored. The reset function does not affect the present states of the TSP-Link trigger lines. Example Sets trigger line 3 low (0). tsplink.
PAGE 706
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual tsplink.writeprotect This attribute contains the write-protect mask that protects bits from changes by the tsplink.writebit() and tsplink.writeport() functions. This attribute is not available on the Models 2604B/2614B/2634B. Type TSP-Link accessible Affected by Where saved Default value Attribute (RW) Yes Instrument reset Recall setup Saved setup 0 Usage mask = tsplink.writeprotect tsplink.
PAGE 707
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 7: TSP command reference Example tspnet.write(testdevice, "print([[hello]])") print(tspnet.readavailable(testdevice)) Write data to a device, then print how much is available. Output: 6.00000e+00 tspnet.clear(testdevice) print(tspnet.readavailable(testdevice)) Clear data and print how much data is available again. Output: 0.00000e+00 Also see tspnet.connect() (on page 7-367) tspnet.readavailable() (on page 7-371) tspnet.
PAGE 708
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Example 1 instrumentID = tspnet.connect("192.0.2.1") if instrumentID then -- Use instrumentID as needed here tspnet.disconnect(instrumentID) end Connect to a TSP-enabled device. instrumentID = tspnet.connect("192.0.2.1", 1394, "*rst\r\n") if instrumentID then -- Use instrumentID as needed here tspnet.disconnect(instrumentID) end Connect to a device that is not TSP-enabled. Example 2 Also see localnode.
PAGE 709
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 7: TSP command reference tspnet.execute() This function sends a command string to the remote device. Type TSP-Link accessible Function No Affected by Where saved Default value Usage tspnet.execute(connectionID, commandString) value1 = tspnet.execute(connectionID, commandString, formatString) value1, value2 = tspnet.execute(connectionID, commandString, formatString) value1, ..., valuen = tspnet.
PAGE 710
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual tspnet.idn() This function retrieves the response of the remote device to *IDN?. Type TSP-Link accessible Function No Affected by Where saved Default value Usage idnString = tspnet.idn(connectionID) idnString The returned *IDN? string connectionID The connection ID returned from tspnet.connect() Details This function retrieves the response of the remote device to *IDN?. Example deviceID = tspnet.
PAGE 711
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 7: TSP command reference Details This command reads available data from the remote instrument and returns responses for the specified number of arguments.
PAGE 712
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Example ID = tspnet.connect("192.0.2.1") tspnet.write(ID, "*idn?\r\n") Send commands that will create data. repeat bytes = tspnet.readavailable(ID) until bytes > 0 Wait for data to be available. print(tspnet.read(ID)) tspnet.disconnect(ID) Also see tspnet.connect() (on page 7-367) tspnet.read() (on page 7-370) tspnet.reset() This function disconnects all TSP-Net sessions.
PAGE 713
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 7: TSP command reference Details This function sets and gets the termination character sequence that is used to indicate the end of a line for a TSP-Net connection. Using the termSequence parameter sets the termination sequence. The present termination sequence is always returned. For the termSequence parameter, use the same values listed in the table above for type.
PAGE 714
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual tspnet.tsp.abort() This function causes the TSP-enabled instrument to stop executing any of the commands that were sent to it. Type TSP-Link accessible Function No Affected by Where saved Default value Usage tspnet.tsp.abort(connectionID) connectionID Integer value used as a handle for other tspnet commands Details This function is appropriate only for TSP-enabled instruments.
PAGE 715
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 7: TSP command reference Details This setting determines if the instrument sends an abort message when it attempts to connect to a TSP-enabled instrument using the tspnet.connect() function. When you send the abort command on an interface, it causes any other active interface on that instrument to close. If you do not send an abort command (or if tspnet.tsp.
PAGE 716
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual tspnet.tsp.runscript() This function loads and runs a script on a remote TSP-enabled instrument. Type TSP-Link accessible Function Yes Affected by Where saved Default value Usage tspnet.tsp.runscript(connectionID, script) tspnet.tsp.
PAGE 717
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 7: TSP command reference Details The tspnet.write() function sends inputString to the remote instrument. It does not wait for command completion on the remote instrument. The Series 2600B sends inputString to the remote instrument exactly as indicated. The inputString must contain any necessary new lines, termination, or other syntax elements needed to complete properly. Because tspnet.
PAGE 718
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual userstring.catalog() This function creates an iterator for the user-defined string catalog. Type TSP-Link accessible Function No Affected by Where saved Default value Usage for name in userstring.
PAGE 719
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 7: TSP command reference Details This function deletes the string that is associated with name from nonvolatile memory. Example userstring.delete("assetnumber") userstring.delete("product") userstring.delete("contact") Deletes the user-defined strings associated with the assetnumber, product, and contact names. Also see userstring.add() (on page 7-377) userstring.catalog() (on page 7-378) userstring.get() (on page 7-379) userstring.
PAGE 720
Section 7: TSP command reference Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual waitcomplete() This function waits for all overlapped commands in a specified group to complete. Type TSP-Link accessible Function No Affected by Where saved Default value Usage waitcomplete() waitcomplete(group) group Specifies which TSP-Link group on which to wait Details This function will wait for all previously started overlapped commands to complete.
PAGE 721
Section 8 Troubleshooting guide In this section: Introduction .............................................................................. 8-1 Error levels ............................................................................... 8-1 Effects of errors on scripts........................................................ 8-2 Retrieving errors....................................................................... 8-2 Error summary list ....................................................................
PAGE 722
Section 8: Troubleshooting guide Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Effects of errors on scripts Most errors will not abort a running script. The only time a script is aborted is when a Lua run-time error (errorerrorerror code -286, "TSP runtime error") is detected. Run-time errors are caused by actions such as trying to index into a variable that is not a table.
PAGE 723
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 8: Troubleshooting guide Error summary list Error summary Error number Error level Error Message -430 RECOVERABLE Query DEADLOCKED -420 -410 -363 -360 RECOVERABLE RECOVERABLE RECOVERABLE RECOVERABLE Query UNTERMINATED Query INTERRUPTED Input buffer overrun Communications error -350 RECOVERABLE Queue overflow -315 -314 -292 -286 -285 -282 -281 -225 -224 -222 RECOVERABLE RECOVERABLE RECOVERABLE RECOVERABLE RECOVERABLE RECOVERA
PAGE 724
Section 8: Troubleshooting guide Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Error summary 8-4 Error number Error level Error Message 1113 1200 1202 1203 RECOVERABLE RECOVERABLE RECOVERABLE RECOVERABLE Data too complex TSP-Link initialization failed TSP-Link initialization failed TSP-Link initialization failed (possible loop in node chain) 1204 1205 1206 1207 1208 1209 RECOVERABLE RECOVERABLE RECOVERABLE RECOVERABLE RECOVERABLE RECOVERABLE TSP-Link initialization failed TSP-Link
PAGE 725
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 8: Troubleshooting guide Error summary Error number Error level Error Message 2204 2205 2206 2207 2211 2212 2213 2214 2215 2216 2217 2218 2219 2220 2221 2222 RECOVERABLE RECOVERABLE RECOVERABLE RECOVERABLE RECOVERABLE RECOVERABLE RECOVERABLE RECOVERABLE RECOVERABLE RECOVERABLE RECOVERABLE RECOVERABLE RECOVERABLE RECOVERABLE RECOVERABLE RECOVERABLE Directory not found File not found Cannot read current working directory Cannot change
PAGE 726
Section 8: Troubleshooting guide Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Error summary 8-6 Error number Error level Error Message 5010 5011 5012 5013 5014 5015 SERIOUS RECOVERABLE RECOVERABLE RECOVERABLE RECOVERABLE RECOVERABLE No such SMU function Operation not permitted while cal is locked Cal data not saved - save or restore before lock Cannot save cal data - unlock before save Cannot restore cal data - unlock before restore Save to cal set disallowed 5016 5017 5018 5019 50
PAGE 727
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 8: Troubleshooting guide LAN troubleshooting suggestions If you are unable to connect to the instrument's web interface, check the following items: • Verify that the network cable is in the LAN port on the rear panel of the instrument, not one of the ® TSP-Link ports (see the description in Rear panel (on page 2-6)). • Verify that the network cable is in the correct port on the computer.
PAGE 728
Section 9 Frequently asked questions (FAQs) In this section: How do I display the instrument's serial number? .................... 9-1 How do I optimize performance?.............................................. 9-2 How do I upgrade the firmware? .............................................. 9-2 How do I use the digital I/O port? ............................................. 9-2 How do I trigger other instruments? ......................................... 9-3 How do I generate a GPIB service request? .....
PAGE 729
Section 9: Frequently asked questions (FAQs) Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual How do I optimize performance? There are three primary factors that affect measurement accuracy and speed: • Warm-up: For rated measurement accuracy, allow the Series 2600B to warm up for at least two hours before use. • Speed setting: The speed setting affects both speed and accuracy (for more information, see Setting speed (on page 2-88)).
PAGE 730
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 9: Frequently asked questions (FAQs) How do I trigger other instruments? Triggering a scanner A typical test scenario might call for using the Series 2600B with a scanner to test a number of devices under test (DUTs) in sequence. A basic example of this uses the Series 2600B digital I/O port to trigger a scanner (shown in the figure below).
PAGE 731
Section 9: Frequently asked questions (FAQs) Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual How do I generate a GPIB service request? For detailed information about this topic, see the Status model (on page 5-14, on page E-1) section of this manual. Setting up a service request The exact programming steps necessary to generate a GPIB service request (SRQ) vary, depending on the events intended to generate the SRQ. In general, these steps are: 1.
PAGE 732
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 9: Frequently asked questions (FAQs) To save the reading buffer data: 1. From the front panel, press the STORE key, and then select SAVE. 2. Select INTERNAL to save to internal nonvolatile memory. 3. Select one of the following: • SMUA_BUFFER1 • SMUA_BUFFER2 • SMUB_BUFFER1* • SMUB_BUFFER2* * Model 2602B/2604B/2612B/2614B/2634B/2636B only. 1. The front panel displays Saving... This may take awhile. 2.
PAGE 733
Section 9: Frequently asked questions (FAQs) Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual How do I make contact check measurements? The Models 2604B, 2614B, and 2634B do not perform contact check measurements. For information about making contact check measurements, see Contact check measurements (on page 2-44) and Contact check (on page 4-22).
PAGE 734
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 9: Frequently asked questions (FAQs) Figure 141: Typical low-current connections (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) Series 2600B interlock digital I/O. Pin 24 (INT) and pin 22 (5 V DC) are connected to the test fixture lid switch. The interlock switch is shown in the disengaged, or lid open, position. Normally-open (NO) interlock metal safety enclosure. HI and LO connections using triaxial female panel mount connectors.
PAGE 735
Section 9: Frequently asked questions (FAQs) Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Low-current measurement programming example Example code for a typical low-current measurement is shown below. This code assumes that a 100 GΩ resistor is being tested. -- Restore defaults. smua.reset() -- Set source to DC V. smua.source.func = smua.OUTPUT_DCVOLTS -- Select 200 V source range. smua.source.rangev = 200 -- Output 100 V DC. smua.source.levelv = 100 -- Select 1 nA range. smua.measure.
PAGE 736
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Section 9: Frequently asked questions (FAQs) Why is the reading value 9.91e37? This value indicates that there is a measurement overflow error.
PAGE 737
Section 10 Next steps In this section: Additional Series 2600B information ...................................... 10-1 Additional Series 2600B information For additional information about the Series 2600B, refer to: • The Product Information CD-ROM (ships with the product): Contains software tools, drivers, and product documentation • The Keithley Instruments website (http://www.keithley.com): Contains the most up-to-date information.
PAGE 738
Appendix A Maintenance In this appendix: Introduction...............................................................................A-1 Line fuse replacement ..............................................................A-1 Front panel tests .......................................................................A-2 Upgrading the firmware ............................................................
PAGE 739
Appendix A: Maintenance Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual To prevent injury, death, or instrument damage, use only the correct fuse type (see table). Perform the following steps to replace the line fuse: 1. Power off the instrument and remove the line cord. 2. The fuse drawer (item 1 in the figure) is located below the AC receptacle. A small tab is located on the top of the fuse drawer (item 2).
PAGE 740
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Appendix A: Maintenance Keys test This test lets you check the functionality of each front panel key. Perform the following steps to run the KEYS test: 1. If the Series 2600B instrument is in remote mode, press the EXIT (LOCAL) key once to place the instrument in local mode. 2. Press the MENU key. 3. Navigate through the menus by turning the navigation wheel .
PAGE 741
Appendix A: Maintenance Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Upgrading the firmware Upgrade files are available on the Keithley Instruments website (http://www.keithley.com). To locate the upgrade files on the Keithley website: 1. Select the Support tab. 2. Search for your model number's firmware: a. b. In the model number box, type 2600B. Select Firmware. c. Click the search button. 3.
PAGE 742
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Appendix A: Maintenance Using TSB for upgrading the firmware After downloading the new flash file from the Keithley Instruments website, you can use Test Script Builder (TSB) to upgrade the firmware of your Series 2600B. 1. If not already running, start Test Script Builder (on the PC desktop, double-click the icon for the Test Script Builder). 2.
PAGE 743
Appendix B Calibration In this appendix: Verification................................................................................B-1 Adjustment ............................................................................. B-18 Verification The information in this topic is intended only for qualified service personnel. Some of the procedures may expose you to hazardous voltages that could result in personal injury or death. Do not attempt to perform these procedures unless you are qualified to do so.
PAGE 744
Appendix B: Calibration Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Verification test requirements Be sure that you perform the verification tests: • • • • • Under the proper environmental conditions. After the specified warm-up period. Using the correct line voltage. Using the proper test equipment. Using the specified output signal and reading limits. Product specifications are subject to change. Listed uncertainties and test limits are provided only as examples.
PAGE 745
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Appendix B: Calibration Recommended verification equipment The following table summarizes recommended maximum allowable test equipment uncertainty for verification points. Total test equipment measurement uncertainty should meet or be less than the listed values at each test point. Generally, test equipment uncertainty should be at least four times better than corresponding Series 2600B specifications.
PAGE 746
Appendix B: Calibration Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Verification limits The verification limits stated in this section have been calculated using only the Series 2600B oneyear accuracy specifications, and they do not include test equipment uncertainty. If a particular measurement falls outside the allowable range, recalculate new limits based both on the Series 2600B specifications and corresponding test equipment specifications.
PAGE 747
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Appendix B: Calibration Performing the verification test procedures Test summary Perform the following verification tests to make sure the instrument is operating within specifications: • • • • Current source accuracy (on page B-7) Current measurement accuracy (on page B-12) Voltage source accuracy (on page B-15) Voltage measurement accuracy (on page B-17) ® If the Series 2600B System SourceMeter instrument is not within specifications and no
PAGE 748
Appendix B: Calibration Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Setting the source range and output value Before testing each verification point, you must properly set the source range and output value. To set the source range and output value: 1. Press the SRC key to select the appropriate source function. 2. Press the navigation wheel to enable the edit mode (EDIT indicator on). 3.
PAGE 749
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Appendix B: Calibration Current source accuracy Follow the steps below to verify that the Series 2600B output current accuracy is within specified limits. An alternate procedure for 100 nA current accuracy is shown in the 1 nA to 100 nA Output current accuracy procedure for the Model 2634B/2635B/2636B. 1.
PAGE 750
Appendix B: Calibration Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Model 2611B/2612B/2614B output current accuracy limits Source range Output current setting Output current limits (1 year, 18 °C to 28 °C) 100 nA 1 µA 10 µA 100 µA 1 mA 10 mA 100 mA 1A 1.5 A 90.000 nA 0.90000 µA 9.0000 µA 90.000 µA 0.90000 mA 9.0000 mA 90.000 mA 0.90000 A 1.35000 A 89.846 nA to 90.154 nA 0.89893 µA to 0.90107µA 8.9923 µA to 9.0077µA 89.913 µA to 90.087 µA 0.89943 mA to 0.90057mA 8.9913 mA to 9.
PAGE 751
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Appendix B: Calibration 3. Capture the reported voltage measurement. 4. Calculate the current from measured voltage and characterized resistance. 5. Verify output current accuracy for each of the currents for the 1 nA to 100 nA ranges listed in the table titled "Model 2634B/2635B/2636B output current accuracy limits." 2600BS-901-01 Rev.
PAGE 752
Appendix B: Calibration Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Figure 145: Connections for 100 nA to 1 A current ranges B-10 2600BS-901-01 Rev.
PAGE 753
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Appendix B: Calibration Figure 146: Connections for 1.5 A and 3 A current ranges 2600BS-901-01 Rev.
PAGE 754
Appendix B: Calibration Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Current measurement accuracy Follow the steps below to verify that Series 2600B current measurement accuracy is within specified limits. The procedure involves applying accurate currents from the Series 2600B current source and then verifying that Series 2600B current measurements are within required limits. 1.
PAGE 755
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Appendix B: Calibration Model 2611B/2612B/2614B current measurement accuracy limits 1 Source and measure range 2 Source current Current reading limits (1 year, 18 °C to 28 °C) 100 nA 90.000 nA 89.846 nA to 90.154 nA 1 µA 0.9000 µA 0.89928 µA to 0.90073 µA 10 µA 9.0000 µA 8.9963 µA to 9.0038 µA 100 µA 1 mA 10 mA 100 mA 1A 1.5 A 90.000 µA 0.9000 mA 9.0000 mA 90.000 mA 0.90000 A 1.3500 A 89.957 µA to 90.043 µA 0.89962 mA to 0.
PAGE 756
Appendix B: Calibration Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Model 2634B/2635B/2636B current measurement accuracy 100 pA to 100 nA ranges A suitably guarded and characterized 1 GΩ resistance standard, such as the Keithley Instruments Model 2600-STD-RES, is necessary for the following measurements. Step-by-step procedures and connection diagrams for verifying the current measurement accuracy for the low current ranges are included with the Model 2600-STD-RES.
PAGE 757
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Appendix B: Calibration Voltage source accuracy Follow the steps below to verify that the Series 2600B output voltage accuracy is within specified limits. To perform this test, you will set the output voltage to each full-range value and measure the voltages with a precision digital multimeter. 1. With the power off, connect the digital multimeter (DMM) to the Series 2600B output terminals using 4-wire connections, as shown below.
PAGE 758
Appendix B: Calibration Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual 2. 3. 4. 5. Set the multimeter measuring function to DC volts. Select the Model 2602B/2604B/2612B/2614B/2634B/2636B single-channel display mode. Press the SRC key to source voltage and make sure the source output is turned on. Enable the Series 2600B 4-wire (remote sense) mode: a. Press the CONFIG key and then the SRC key. b. Select V-SOURCE > SENSE-MODE > 4-WIRE. 6.
PAGE 759
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Appendix B: Calibration Voltage measurement accuracy Follow the steps below to verify that the Series 2600B voltage measurement accuracy is within specified limits. To perform this test, you will set the source voltage, as measured by a precision digital multimeter, and then verify that the Series 2600B voltage readings are within required limits. 1.
PAGE 760
Appendix B: Calibration Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Model 2611B/2612B/2614B/2634B/2635B/2636B voltage measurement accuracy limits 1 Source and measure range 2 Source voltage Voltage reading limits (1 year, 18 °C to 28 °C) 200 mV 180.000 mV 179.748 mV to 180.252 mV 2V 1.80000 V 1.79929 V to 1.80071 V 20 V 18.0000 V 17.9923 V to 18.0077 V 200 V 180.000 V 179.923 V to 180.077 V 1. Measure range coupled to source range when simultaneously sourcing and measuring voltage.
PAGE 761
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Appendix B: Calibration Line power The Series 2600B requires a line voltage of 100 V to 240 V at a line frequency of 50 Hz or 60 Hz. The instrument must be calibrated within this range. Warmup period ® Allow the Series 2600B System SourceMeter instrument to warm up for at least two hours before performing calibration.
PAGE 762
Appendix B: Calibration Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Recommended calibration adjustment equipment The table below contains the recommended equipment for the calibration adjustment procedures. You can use alternate equipment as long as that equipment has specifications equal to or greater than those listed in the table. When possible, test equipment specifications should be at least four times better than corresponding Series 2600B specifications.
PAGE 763
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Appendix B: Calibration Parameter values The full-scale parameters are actually 90% of full-scale as indicated (see the table contained in Step sequence (on page B-22)). Note that you cannot send a value of exactly 0 for the two zero parameters. Instead, you must send a very small value, such as 1e-30 or -1e-30. Sense modes The preceding table for your specific model lists the sense modes for the calibration steps.
PAGE 764
Appendix B: Calibration Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Step sequence Adjustment steps must be performed in a specific sequence. See the following table that is specific table to your model. Note that all steps are performed using 2-wire (local sensing) except as noted.
PAGE 765
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Appendix B: Calibration Model 2611B/2612B/2614B calibration steps Function 1 Voltage Source and Measure 2 3 4 Calibration steps Calibration points Sense mode 200 mV 200 mV 2V 2V 20 V 200 V ±1e-30, ±180 mV ±1e-30, ±180 mV ±1e-30, ±1.8 V ±1e-30, ±1.8 V ±1e-30, ±18 V ±1e-30, ±180 V smuX.SENSE_LOCAL smuX.SENSE_REMOTE smuX.SENSE_LOCAL smuX.SENSE_CALA smuX.SENSE_LOCAL smuX.SENSE_LOCAL Current Source and Measure smuX.
PAGE 766
Appendix B: Calibration Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Calibration commands quick reference The following table summarizes remote calibration commands. For a more complete description of these commands, refer to the TSP command reference (on page 7-1). Calibration commands Command** B-24 Description smuX.cal.adjustdate = adjustDate smuX.cal.date = calDate smuX.cal.due = calDue Set date when the adjustment was done. smuX.cal.password = "newPassword" smuX.cal.
PAGE 767
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Appendix B: Calibration Calibration commands Command** Description smuX.contact.calibratelo( cp1Measured, cp1Reference, cp2Measured, cp2Reference) Adjust the low/sense low contact check measurement calibration. cp1Measured (value measured by SMU for cal. point 1). cp1Reference (reference measurement for cal. point 1). cp2Measured (value measured by SMU for cal. point 2). cp2Reference (reference measurement for cal. point 2). smuX.contact.
PAGE 768
Appendix B: Calibration Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Step 2. Voltage calibration adjustment A. Connect the Series 2600B SMU to the digital multimeter using the 4-wire connections shown in the figure below, and select the multimeter DC volts function. Figure 148: Connections for voltage calibration B-26 2600BS-901-01 Rev.
PAGE 769
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Appendix B: Calibration B. Send the following commands in order to initialize voltage calibration: smua.cal.unlock("KI0026XX") smua.reset() smua.source.func = smua.OUTPUT_DCVOLTS It is not necessary to set the measure range when following this procedure for calibration because the measure range is locked to the source range when measuring the source function. C.
PAGE 770
Appendix B: Calibration Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Typical values for the Model 2601B/2602B/2604B 1 V range: smua.source.calibratev(1, 1e-30, 1e-5, 0.9, 0.903) Typical values for the Models 2611B/2612B/2614B/2634B/2635B/2636B 2 V range: smua.source.calibratev(2, 1e-30, 1e-5, 1.8, 1.802) 12. If this step is not on the CALA sense mode, send the measure calibration command using the multimeter and Series 2600B readings, and the range setting for the parameters.
PAGE 771
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Appendix B: Calibration Where: -range src_Z DMM_Z_rdg src_FS DMM_FS_rdg = The negative of the present calibration range = The -zero Series 2600B programmed source output value = The -zero DMM measurement = The -FS Series 2600B programmed source output value = The -FS DMM measurement Typical values for the Model 2601B/2602B/2604B 1 V range: smua.source.calibratev(-1, -1e-30, -1e-4, -0.9, -0.
PAGE 772
Appendix B: Calibration Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Figure 149: Connections for 100 nA to 1 A current ranges B-30 2600BS-901-01 Rev.
PAGE 773
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Appendix B: Calibration It is not necessary to set the measure range when following this procedure for calibration because the measure range is locked to the source range when measuring the source function. C. Perform each calibration step listed in Model 2601B/2602B/2604B step sequence, Model 2611B/2612B/2614B step sequence, or Model 2634B/2635B/2636B step sequence for the 100 nA through 1 A ranges as follows: 1.
PAGE 774
Appendix B: Calibration Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Typical values for the 100 mA range: smua.source.calibratei(100e-3, 1e-30, 1e-5, 90e-3, 88e-3) 12. If this step is not on the CALA sense mode, send the measure calibration command using the multimeter and Series 2600B readings, and range setting for the parameters: smua.measure.
PAGE 775
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Appendix B: Calibration Typical values for the 100 mA range: smua.source.calibratei(-100e-3, -1e-30, -1e-6, -90e-3, -89.2e-3) 22. If this step is not on the CALA sense mode, send the measure calibration command using the multimeter and Series 2600B readings, and range setting for the parameters: smua.measure.
PAGE 776
Appendix B: Calibration Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual D. Before continuing, be sure to complete steps 1 through 22 for the 100 nA to 1 A ranges before continuing with 3 A and 10 A range calibration (Model 2601B/2602B/2604B) or 1.5 A and 10 A range calibration (Model 2611B/2612B/2614B/2634B/2635B/2636B). E. Change connections as shown in the following figure. Figure 150: Connections for 1.5 A and 3 A current ranges B-34 2600BS-901-01 Rev.
PAGE 777
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Appendix B: Calibration F. Select the DMM DC volts function. G. Repeat the 22 steps of C for the 3 A and 10 A ranges (Model 2601B/2602B/2604B) or 1.5 A and 10 A ranges (Model 2611B/2612B/2614B/2634B/2635B/2636B). Compute the current reading from the DMM voltage reading and characterized 0.5 Ω resistance value: I = V/R. H. Select automatic polarity mode: smua.cal.polarity = smua.CAL_AUTO Models 2634B, 2635B, and 2636B: 1.
PAGE 778
Appendix B: Calibration Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Step 4. Contact check calibration adjustment Skip this step for the Models 2604B, 2614B, and 2634B. The Models 2604B, 2614B, and 2634B do not perform contact check measurements. A. As illustrated in the following figure: • Short the Series 2600B SENSE LO and LO terminals together. • Short the SENSE HI and HI terminals together. Figure 151: Connections for contact check 0 ohm calibration B-36 2600BS-901-01 Rev.
PAGE 779
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Appendix B: Calibration B. Allow the readings to settle, then get the Series 2600B readings: r0_hi, r0_lo = smua.contact.r() C. Characterize both 50 Ω resistors using the resistance function of the digital multimeter. D. As illustrated in the following figure: • Characterize both 50 Ω resistors using the resistance function of the digital multimeter. • Connect a 50 Ω resistor between the SENSE LO and LO terminals.
PAGE 780
Appendix B: Calibration Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual G. Send the contact check high calibration command: smua.contact.
PAGE 781
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Appendix B: Calibration Step 8. Repeat calibration procedure for Model 2602B/2604B/2612B/2614B/2634B/2636B Channel B For the Models 2602B/2604B/2612B/2614B/2634B/2636B only, repeat the entire procedure above for Channel B. Be sure to: • • Make test connections to Channel B terminals. Substitute "smub" for "smua" in all commands. 2600BS-901-01 Rev.
PAGE 782
Appendix C LAN concepts and settings In this appendix: Overview ................................................................................. C-1 Establishing a point-to-point connection .................................. C-1 Connecting to the LAN .......................................................... C-10 LAN speeds ........................................................................... C-12 Duplex mode .........................................................................
PAGE 783
Appendix C: LAN concepts and settings Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Contact your corporate information technology (IT) department for permission before you connect the Series 2600B to a corporate network. If you have problems, see LAN troubleshooting suggestions (on page 8-7). Record all network configurations before modifying any existing network configuration information on the network interface card.
PAGE 784
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Appendix C: LAN concepts and settings Figure 153: Computer IP configuration using the command prompt If the information for the ethernet adapter displays "Media Disconnected," close the command prompt and go to Step 2: Disable DHCP to use the computer's existing IP address (on page C-4). 3.
PAGE 785
Appendix C: LAN concepts and settings Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Step 2: Disable DHCP to use the computer's existing IP address Do not change the IP address at any time without talking to your system administrator. Entering an incorrect IP address can prevent your workstation from connecting to your corporate network. See the appropriate instructions below for your operating system. These instructions show the default options.
PAGE 786
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Appendix C: LAN concepts and settings 5. Select Use the following IP address. The option for "Use the following DNS server addresses" is automatically selected. 6. Set the IP address. If the IP address and subnet mask fields: • Contain values: Record the IP address, subnet mask, default gateway, and DNS servers to use in Step 3: Configure the instrument's LAN settings (on page C-8). • Are blank: In the IP address field, enter 192.168.1.100.
PAGE 787
Appendix C: LAN concepts and settings Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual 5. Select Use the following IP address. The option for "Use the following DNS server addresses" is automatically selected. 6. Set the IP address. If the IP address and subnet mask fields: • Contain values: Record the IP address, subnet mask, default gateway, and DNS servers to use in Step 3: Configure the instrument's LAN settings (on page C-8). • Are blank: In the IP address field, enter 192.168.1.100.
PAGE 788
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Appendix C: LAN concepts and settings 8. Select Use the following IP address. The option for "Use the following DNS server addresses" is automatically selected. 9. Set the IP address. If the IP address and subnet mask fields: • Contain values: Record the IP address, subnet mask, default gateway, and DNS servers to use in Step 3: Configure the instrument's LAN settings (on page C-8). • Are blank: In the IP address field, enter 192.168.1.100.
PAGE 789
Appendix C: LAN concepts and settings Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual 5. Select Use the following IP address. The option for "Use the following DNS server addresses" is automatically selected. 6. Set the IP address. If the IP address and subnet mask fields: • Contain values: Record the IP address, subnet mask, default gateway, and DNS servers to use in Step 3: Configure the instrument's LAN settings (on page C-8). • Are blank: In the IP address field, enter 192.168.1.100.
PAGE 790
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Appendix C: LAN concepts and settings 5. Change the subnet mask from the LAN CONFIG menu: a. b. c. d. Select CONFIG > SUBNETMASK, and then press the ENTER key. The SUBNETMASK menu item is to the right of GATEWAY. Use the navigation wheel to scroll through the options. Modify the SUBNETMASK value to match the computer settings recorded earlier (or 255.255.255.000 if DHCP Enabled = YES).
PAGE 791
Appendix C: LAN concepts and settings Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Step 5: Access the instrument's web page 1. Open a web browser on the host computer. 2. Enter the IP address of the instrument in the web browser address box. For example, if the instrument IP address is 192.168.1.101, enter 192.168.1.101 in the browser address box. 3. Press Enter on the computer keyboard to open the instrument web page.
PAGE 792
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Appendix C: LAN concepts and settings Setting the IP address Contact your corporate information technology (IT) department to secure a valid IP address for the instrument when placing the instrument on a corporate network. To set the IP address (when LAN configuration method is set to MANUAL): 1. From the front panel, press the MENU key, and then select LAN > CONFIG > IP-ADDRESS. 2. 3. 4. 5.
PAGE 793
Appendix C: LAN concepts and settings Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Configuring the domain name system (DNS) The domain name system (DNS) lets you type a domain name in the address bar to connect to the instrument. If you use DNS, you can use a name instead of an IP address. Example: Model2600B.XYZcompany.com Contact your corporate information technology (IT) department to learn more about DNS. If a DNS server is not part of the LAN infrastructure, this setting is not used.
PAGE 794
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Appendix C: LAN concepts and settings To set the LAN speed: 1. From the front panel, press the MENU key and select LAN > CONFIG > SPEED. 2. 3. 4. 5. Turn the navigation wheel to select either 10 Mbps or 100 Mbps. Press the ENTER key. Press the EXIT (LOCAL) key once to return to the previous menu. Select APPLY_SETTINGS > YES, and then press the ENTER key. Duplex mode The duplex mode is based on the LAN configuration.
PAGE 795
Appendix C: LAN concepts and settings Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Searching for DNS server(s) Starting DLLA Configuration DLLA Failed DLLA configuration started on xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx Starting Manual Configuration Manual configuration started on xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx Closed Viewing the network settings To view the active network settings: 1. From the front panel, press the MENU key, and then select LAN > STATUS. 2.
PAGE 796
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Appendix C: LAN concepts and settings Confirming port numbers To view the port number assigned to each remote interface protocol: 1. From the front panel, press the MENU key, and then select LAN > STATUS > PORT. 2. Use the navigation wheel • RAW-SOCKET • TELNET • VXI-11 • DST to select one of the following: 1. Press the ENTER key to view the port number. 2. Press the EXIT (LOCAL) key once to return to the PORT menu.
PAGE 797
Appendix C: LAN concepts and settings Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Raw socket connection All Keithley instruments that have LAN connections support raw socket communication. This means that you can connect to the TCP/IP port on the instrument and send and receive commands. A programmer can easily communicate with the instrument using Winsock on Windows computers or Berkley sockets on Linux or Apple computers.
PAGE 798
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Appendix C: LAN concepts and settings Figure 160: Connection description dialog box 2. Type a name to identify the connection (for example, My Instrument), and then click OK. 3. In the Connect To dialog box, click the Connect using list. Select TCP/IP (Winsock). Figure 161: Connect To dialog box 4. In the Host address field, type the instrument's IP address (for example, 192.168.1.101) . 5. Type 23 in the Port number field, and then click OK.
PAGE 799
Appendix C: LAN concepts and settings Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Figure 162: Properties dialog box 8. Click ASCII Setup. The ASCII Setup dialog box is displayed. 9. From the ASCII Setup dialog box, select the following options: • Send line ends with line feeds • Echo typed characters locally Figure 163: ASCII Setup dialog box C-18 2600BS-901-01 Rev.
PAGE 800
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Appendix C: LAN concepts and settings 1. Click OK in the ASCII Setup dialog box. The Properties dialog box is displayed. 2. Click OK in the Properties dialog box. Use the HyperTerminal window to interact directly with the instrument.
PAGE 801
Appendix C: LAN concepts and settings Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Event log descriptions Column title Description Example Received Time Event ID Displays the date and time that the LAN trigger occurred in UTC, 24-hour time Identifies the lan.trigger[N] that generates an event 06:56:28.000 8 May 2011 From Displays the IP address for the device that generates the LAN trigger LAN0 = lan.trigger[1] LAN1 = lan.trigger[2] LAN2 = lan.trigger[3] LAN3 = lan.
PAGE 802
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Appendix C: LAN concepts and settings This command outputs one or more strings similar to the following: 14:14:02.000 17 Jun 2008, LAN0, 10.80.64.191, LXI, 0, 1213712000, not available, 0, 0x10,0x00 The string displays the same information as the web interface. Commas separate the fields.
PAGE 803
Appendix D Common commands In this appendix: Command summary ................................................................ D-1 Script command equivalents ................................................... D-3 Command reference ................................................................ D-3 Command summary The IEEE Std 488.2 common commands that are supported by the Series 2600B are summarized in the following table.
PAGE 804
Appendix D: Common commands Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Unlike other commands, like those listed in TSP commands (on page 7-7), each common command must be sent in a separate message. The common commands cannot be used in scripts.
PAGE 805
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Appendix D: Common commands Script command equivalents The commands that can be included in scripts that are equivalent to the common commands are defined in the table below. Common command Script command equivalent *CLS *ESE? *ESE *ESR? *IDN? status.reset() print(tostring(status.standard.enable)) status.standard.enable = print(tostring(status.standard.event)) print([[Keithley Instruments Inc., Model]]..localnode.model..[[, ]]..
PAGE 806
Appendix D: Common commands Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Operation complete and query: *OPC and *OPC? Wait for pending overlapped commands to complete. *OPC Operation complete command that sets the OPC bit *OPC? Operation complete query that places a "1" in the output queue When *OPC is sent, the OPC bit in the Standard Event Register (see Status model (on page 5-14, on page E-1)) is set when all overlapped commands complete.
PAGE 807
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Appendix D: Common commands Wait-to-continue: *WAI Suspends the execution of subsequent commands until all previous overlapped commands are finished. *WAI This pauses until overlapped commands are complete Two types of device commands exist: • Overlapped commands. Commands that allow the execution of subsequent commands while instrument operations of the overlapped command are still in progress. • Sequential commands.
PAGE 808
Appendix E Status model In this appendix: Overview ..................................................................................E-1 Clearing registers ................................................................... E-14 Programming and reading registers ....................................... E-14 Status byte and service request (SRQ) .................................. E-15 Status register sets ................................................................. E-19 TSP-Link system status ...........
PAGE 809
Appendix E: Status model Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual An event is represented by a condition register bit changing from a 1 to 0 or 0 to 1. When an event occurs and the appropriate NTR or PTR bit is set, the corresponding event register bit is set to 1. The event bit remains latched to 1 until the event register is read or the status model is reset. When an event register bit is set and its corresponding enable bit is set, the summary bit of the register is set to 1.
PAGE 810
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Appendix E: Status model Error queue The error queue holds error and status messages. As programming errors and status messages occur, a message that defines the error or status is placed in the error queue. An error or status message is cleared from the error queue when it is read. You can also clear the error queue by sending the command errorqueue.clear(). An empty error queue clears the error available (EAV) bit in the Status Byte Register.
PAGE 811
Appendix E: Status model Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Status function summary The following functions and attributes control and read the various registers. Additional information for the various register sets is included later in this section. Also, refer to the specific command as listed in TSP commands (on page 7-7). Status function summary Type Function or attribute Status summary status.condition status.node_enable status.node_event status.request_enable status.
PAGE 812
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Appendix E: Status model Status model diagrams The following figures graphically describe the status model: • • • • • • • • Status byte and service request enable register (on page E-6) System summary and standard event registers (on page E-7) Measurement event registers (on page E-8) Operation status registers (on page E-9) Operation status trigger overrun registers (on page E-10) Operation status trigger timer, trigger blender, and remote re
PAGE 813
Appendix E: Status model Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Figure 165: Status byte and service request enable register E-6 2600BS-901-01 Rev.
PAGE 814
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Appendix E: Status model Figure 166: System summary and standard event registers 2600BS-901-01 Rev.
PAGE 815
Appendix E: Status model Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Figure 167: Measurement event registers E-8 2600BS-901-01 Rev.
PAGE 816
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Appendix E: Status model Figure 168: Operation status registers 2600BS-901-01 Rev.
PAGE 817
Appendix E: Status model Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Figure 169: Operation status trigger overrun registers E-10 2600BS-901-01 Rev.
PAGE 818
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Appendix E: Status model Figure 170: Operation status trigger timer, trigger blender, and remote registers 2600BS-901-01 Rev.
PAGE 819
Appendix E: Status model Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Figure 171: Operation status digital I/O and TSP-Link registers E-12 2600BS-901-01 Rev.
PAGE 820
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Appendix E: Status model Figure 172: Questionable status registers 2600BS-901-01 Rev.
PAGE 821
Appendix E: Status model Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Clearing registers Commands to reset the status registers are listed in the table below. In addition to these commands, you can reset the enable registers and the NTR to 0. To do this, send the individual command to program the register with a 0 as its parameter value. The PTR registers can be reset to their defaults by programming them with all bits on.
PAGE 822
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Appendix E: Status model When using a numeric parameter, registers are programmed by including the appropriate mask value. For example: *ese 1169 status.standard.enable = 1169 To convert from decimal to binary, use the information shown in the above figure. For example, to set bits B0, B4, B7, and B10, a decimal value of 1169 would be used for the mask parameter (1169 = 1 + 16 + 128 + 1024).
PAGE 823
Appendix E: Status model Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Status Byte Register The summary messages from the status registers and queues are used to set or clear the appropriate bits (B0, B1, B2, B3, B4, B5, and B7) of the Status Byte Register. These summary bits do not latch, and their states (0 or 1) are dependent upon the summary messages (0 or 1). For example, if the Standard Event Register is read, its register will clear.
PAGE 824
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Appendix E: Status model The bits of the Status Byte Register are described as follows: • Bit B0, Measurement Summary Bit (MSB): Set summary bit indicates that an enabled measurement event has occurred. • Bit B1, System Summary Bit (SSB): Set summary bit indicates that an enabled system event has occurred. • Bit B2, Error Available (EAV): Set bit indicates that an error or status message is present in the error queue.
PAGE 825
Appendix E: Status model Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Serial polling and SRQ Any enabled event summary bit that goes from 0 to 1 sets bit B6 and generates a service request (SRQ). In your test program, you can periodically read the Status Byte to check if an SRQ has occurred and what caused it. If an SRQ occurs, the program can, for example, branch to an appropriate subroutine that will service the request. SRQs can be managed by the serial poll sequence of the instrument.
PAGE 826
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Appendix E: Status model Enable and transition registers In general, there are three types of user-writable registers that are used to configure which bits feed the register summary bit and when it occurs. The registers are identified in each applicable command (as listed in TSP commands (on page 7-7)) as follows: • Enable register (identified as .
PAGE 827
Appendix E: Status model Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual For example, either of the following commands will set the EXT enable bit: status.system.enable = status.system.EXT status.system.enable = 1 When reading a register, a numeric value is returned. The binary equivalent of this value indicates which bits in the register are set. For details, see Reading registers (on page E-15). For example, the following command will read the System Enable Register: print(status.system.
PAGE 828
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Appendix E: Status model Commands to program and read the register are summarized below and also in the Status function summary (on page E-4) table. Standard event commands Command Description *ESR? or print(status.standard.event) Read Standard Event Status Register. *ESE mask or status.standard.enable = mask Program the Event Status Enable Register: mask = 0 to 255 See Status register set contents (on page E-1). *ESE? or print(status.
PAGE 829
Appendix E: Status model Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Operation Status Registers As shown in the status model's Operation status registers (on page E-9) diagram, there are 22 register sets associated with operation status. Commands are summarized in the Status register set contents (on page E-1) topic. Note that bits can also be set by using numeric parameter values. For details, see Programming enable and transition registers (on page E-14).
PAGE 830
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Appendix E: Status model Questionable Status Registers This register set feeds to bit B3 (QSB) of the Status Byte. The bits used in the Questionable Status Register set are described as follows: • • • Bit B8, Calibration (CAL): Set bit indicates that calibration is questionable. • Bit B13, Instrument Summary (INST): Set bit indicates that a bit in the Questionable Status Instrument Summary Register is set.
PAGE 831
Appendix E: Status model Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Measurement Event Registers As shown in the status model's Measurement event registers (on page E-8), there are eight register sets associated with measurement event status. Commands are summarized in the Status register set contents (on page E-1) topic. Note that bits can also be set by using numeric parameter values. For details, see Programming enable and transition registers (on page E-14) .
PAGE 832
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Appendix E: Status model Register programming example The command sequence below programs the instrument to generate a service request (SRQ) and set the system summary bit in all TSP-Link nodes when the current limit on channel A is exceeded. -- Clear all registers. status.reset() -- Enable current limit bit in current limit register. status.measurement.current_limit.enable = status.measurement.current_limit.
PAGE 833
Appendix E: Status model Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual TSP-Link system status ® TSP-Link is not available on the Models 2604B/2614B/2634B. ® The TSP-Link expansion interface allows instruments to communicate with each other. The test system can be expanded to include up to 32 TSP-enabled instruments. In a TSP-Link system, one node (instrument) is the master and the other nodes are the subordinates. The master can control the other nodes (subordinates) in the system.
PAGE 834
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Appendix E: Status model Status configuration (enable) commands The following commands (sent from the master node) enable the appropriate register bits for the above example: Node 15 status registers: The following commands enable the current limit events for SMU A and B of node 15: node[15].status.measurement.current_limit.enable = 6 node[15].status.measurement.enable = 2 node[15].status.
PAGE 835
Appendix E: Status model Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual The affected status register for the above command is indicated by label E (see the following figure). Figure 175: TSP-Link status model configuration example E-28 2600BS-901-01 Rev.
PAGE 836
Appendix F Display character codes In this appendix: Series 2600B display character codes ..................................... F-1 Series 2600B display character codes The following tables contain the display character codes (decimal values) and their corresponding display.
PAGE 837
Appendix F: Display character codes Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Display character codes (decimal 40 to 102) F-2 Decimal Display Decimal Display Decimal Display 040 ( 061 = 082 R 041 ) 062 > 083 S 042 * 063 ? 084 T 043 + 064 @ 085 U 044 , (comma) 065 A 086 V 045 - 066 B 087 W 046 .
PAGE 838
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Appendix F: Display character codes Display character codes (decimal 103 to 165 ) Decimal Display Decimal Display Decimal 103 g 124 | 145 104 h 125 } 146 105 i 126 ~ 147 106 j 127 107 k 128 108 l 129 150 109 m 130 151 110 n 131 152 111 o 132 153 112 p 133 154 113 q 134 155 114 r 135 156 115 s 136 157 116 t 137 158 117 u 138 159 ¼ 118 v 139 160 0 119 w 140 161 1 120 x
PAGE 839
Appendix F: Display character codes Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Display character codes (decimal 166 to 228) F-4 Decimal Display Decimal Display Decimal Display 166 6 187 Φ 208 æ 167 7 188 ∩ 209 Æ 168 8 189 ∪ 210 â 169 9 190 ÷ 211 ä 170 α 191 ≤ 212 á 171 ß 192 ≥ 213 à 172 γ 193 ≠ 214 å 173 δ 194 ≡ 215 174 ε 195 ≈ 216 Ä 175 η 196 ∞ 217 Å 176 θ 197 >> 218 ê 177 λ 198 << 219 ë 178 π 199 ¿ 220
PAGE 840
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Appendix F: Display character codes Display character codes (decimal 229 to 255 ) Decimal Display Decimal Display Decimal 229 ó 238 ñ 247 230 ò 239 Ñ 248 240 ÿ 249 231 Display 232 Ö 241 250 233 û 242 251 † 234 ü 243 252 ↑ 235 ú 244 253 ↓ 236 ù 245 254 ← 237 Ü 246 255 → 2600BS-901-01 Rev.
PAGE 841
PAGE 842
Appendix G Model 2400 emulation In this appendix: Model 2400 emulation ............................................................. G-1 Model 2400 compatibility ......................................................... G-3 Model 2400 emulation The Series 2600B provides for emulation of the Model 2400 command set using a personality script named Persona2400. When run, this script takes control of the remote command interfaces and interprets any commands received.
PAGE 843
Appendix G: Model 2400 emulation Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual To start Model 2400 emulation: 1. Press the LOAD key and then select USER from the menu. 2. Select Run2400 and press the ENTER key (if this test is not loaded, you must load the script into internal nonvolatile memory). 3. Press the RUN key. You will notice the REM indicator lights (the script places the instrument in remote). To configure options for the Model 2400 emulation: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
PAGE 844
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Appendix G: Model 2400 emulation Model 2400 compatibility This section provides information on programming the Series 2600B in Model 2400 emulation mode. The information provided includes details of general compatibility and tables that contain listings of the not supported, partially supported, and fully supported commands. General compatibility Observe the following details when operating the Series 2600B in Model 2400 emulation mode.
PAGE 845
Appendix G: Model 2400 emulation Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Status model While in Model 2400 emulation mode, the following bits in the status model are always set to 0 (not supported): Operation Condition Register: • Bit 0 (Cal), bit 5 (Trig), bit 6 (Arm) Measurement Condition Register: • Bit 10 (CC), bit 13 (OVP) Questionable Condition Register: • Bit 14 (Warn) Standard Event Status Register: • Bit 2 (QYE) Overrange When running a sweep while in Model 2400 em
PAGE 846
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Appendix G: Model 2400 emulation Digital I/O mapping The Models 2604B, 2614B, and 2634B do not have digital input/output lines. When in Model 2400 emulation mode, digital I/O lines 1 through 9 are used to emulate different Model 2400 lines through the digital I/O port (see Digital I/O port (on page 3-83)). The following table shows the mapping.
PAGE 847
Appendix G: Model 2400 emulation Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Model 2400 SCPI command support The following table provides a listing of Model 2400 commands and emulation support for the Series 2600B. In the supported column: Yes indicates the command is fully supported; No indicates the command is not supported; Partially indicates the command is supported, but with stipulations as noted in Model 2400 SCPI command compatibility (on page G-15).
PAGE 848
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Appendix G: Model 2400 emulation Subsystem Command Supported :CALCulate :CALCulate :CALCulate :CALCulate :CALCulate :CALCulate :CALCulate :CALCulate :CALCulate :CALCulate :CALCulate :CALCulate :CALCulate :CALCulate :CALCulate :CALCulate :CALCulate :CALCulate :CALCulate :CALCulate :CALCulate :CALCulate :CALCulate :DISPlay :DISPlay :DISPlay :DISPlay :DISPlay :DISPlay :DISPlay :DISPlay :DISPlay :DISPlay :DISPlay :DISPlay :DISPlay :DISPlay :DISPla
PAGE 849
Appendix G: Model 2400 emulation Subsystem Command Supported :FORMat :MEASure :MEASure :MEASure :MEASure :MEASure :MEASure :MEASure :MEASure :MEASure :OUTPut :OUTPut :OUTPut :OUTPut :OUTPut :OUTPut :OUTPut :ROUte :ROUte :SENSe[1] :SENSe[1] :SENSe[1] :SENSe[1] :SENSe[1] :SENSe[1] :SENSe[1] :SENSe[1] :SENSe[1] Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Partially Partially Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes :SENSe[1] :SENSe[1] :SENSe[1] :SENSe[1] :SENSe[1] :SENSe[1] :SENSe[1] :SE
PAGE 850
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Appendix G: Model 2400 emulation Subsystem Command Supported :SENSe[1] :SENSe[1] :SENSe[1] :SENSe[1] :SENSe[1] [:SENSe[1]]:FUNCtion[:ON]:COUNt? [:SENSe[1]]:FUNCtion:STATe? "CURRent[:DC]"|"VOLTage[:DC]"|"RESistance" [:SENSe[1]]:RESistance:MODE MANual|AUTO [:SENSe[1]]:RESistance:MODE? [:SENSe[1]]:RESistance:NPLCycles |DEFault|MINimum|MAXimum Yes Yes Partially Yes Yes :SENSe[1] :SENSe[1] :SENSe[1] :SENSe[1] :SENSe[1] :SENSe[1] :SENSe[1] :
PAGE 851
Appendix G: Model 2400 emulation G-10 Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Subsystem Command Supported :SOURce :SOURce :SOURce :SOURce :SOURce :SOURce :SOURce :SOURce :SOURce :SOURce :SOURce :SOURce :SOURce :SOURce :SOURce :SOURce :SOURce :SOURce :SOURce :SOURce :SOURce :SOURce :SOURce :SOURce :SOURce :SOURce :SOURce :SOURce :SOURce :SOURce :SOURce :SOURce :SOURce :SOURce :SOURce :SOURce :SOURce :SOURce :SOURce :SOURce :SOURce :SOURce :SOURce :SOURce :SOURce :SOURce :SOURce :SOU
PAGE 852
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Appendix G: Model 2400 emulation Subsystem Command Supported :SOURce :SOURce :SOURce :SOURce :SOURce :SOURce :SOURce Partially Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes :SOURce :SOURce :SOURce :SOURce :SOURce :SOURce :SOURce :SOURce :SOURce :SOURce :SOURce :SOURce :SOURce :SOURce :SOURce :SOURce :SOURce :SOURce :SOURce :SOURce :SOURce :SOURce :SOURce :SOURce :SOURce :SOURce :SOURce :SOURce :SOURce :SOURce :SOURce :SOURce :SOURce :SOURce :SOURce :SOURce :SOURc
PAGE 853
Appendix G: Model 2400 emulation G-12 Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Subsystem Command Supported :STATus :STATus :STATus :STATus :STATus :STATus :STATus :STATus :STATus :STATus :STATus :STATus :STATus :STATus :STATus :SYSTem :SYSTem :SYSTem :SYSTem :SYSTem :SYSTem :SYSTem :SYSTem :SYSTem :SYSTem :SYSTem :SYSTem :SYSTem :SYSTem :SYSTem :SYSTem :SYSTem :SYSTem :SYSTem :SYSTem :SYSTem :SYSTem :SYSTem :SYSTem :SYSTem :SYSTem :SYSTem :SYSTem :SYSTem :SYSTem :SYSTem :SYSTem :SYS
PAGE 854
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Appendix G: Model 2400 emulation Subsystem Command Supported :SYSTem :SYSTem :SYSTem :SYSTem :SYSTem :SYSTem :SYSTem :SYSTem :SYSTem :SYSTem :SYSTem :TRACe :TRACe :TRACe :TRACe :TRACe :TRACe :TRACe :TRACe :TRACe :TRACe :TRACe :TRACe :TRIGger :TRIGger :TRIGger :TRIGger No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes :TRIGger :TRIGger :TRIGger :TRIGger :TRIGger :TRIGger :TRIGger :TRIGge
PAGE 855
Appendix G: Model 2400 emulation Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Subsystem Command :TRIGger :TRIGger :TRIGger :TRIGger :TRIGger :TRIGger :TRIGger :TRIGger :TRIGger :TRIGger :TRIGger G-14 Supported SOURce|DELay|SENSe|NONE :TRIGger[:SEQuence[1]][:TCONfigure][:ASYNchronous]:INPut? :TRIGger[:SEQuence[1]][:TCONfigure][:ASYNchronous]:OLINe 1|2|3|4 :TRIGger[:SEQuence[1]][:TCONfigure][:ASYNchronous]:OLINe? :TRIGger[:SEQuence[1]][:TCONfigure][:ASYNchronous]:OUTPut SOURce|DELay|SENSe
PAGE 856
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Appendix G: Model 2400 emulation Model 2400 SCPI command compatibility The following tables lists all the Model 2400 SCPI commands that are not fully supported by the Model 2400 personality script (Persona2400) and each command's specific compatibility details. :CALCulate subsystem :CALCulate2:NULL:ACQuire Each time the personality script is run, the null offset value will be reset to zero (0).
PAGE 857
Appendix G: Model 2400 emulation Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual :SENSe[1] subsystem [:SENSe[1]]:CURRent[:DC]:PROTection:RSYNchronize The measurement range will only track the limit range when the output is on. [:SENSe[1]]:FUNCtion:OFF:ALL Reading are not taken when all the functions are turned off. [:SENSe[1]]:RESistance:MODE MANual|AUTO Only MANual is supported. The instrument will generate an error if AUTO is selected.
PAGE 858
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual Appendix G: Model 2400 emulation :SYSTem subsystem :SYSTem:AZERo:CACHing:NPLCycles? Always returns 0. :SYSTem:AZERo:CACHing:REFResh This command is accepted and ignored. Causes no action or response. :SYSTem:AZERo:CACHing:RESet This command is accepted and ignored. Causes no action or response. :SYSTem:AZERo:CACHing[:STATe] This command is accepted and ignored. The setting is always ON. :SYSTem:AZERo:CACHing[:STATe]? Always returns 1.
PAGE 859
Index A analog-to-digital converter • 2-30, 2-88, 4-1 anonymous script • 6-5 arrays • 6-25 attribute • 5-2 assigning a value to • 5-2 reading • 5-2 autoexec script • 6-7 autorun scripts • 6-6 autozero • 2-31 front panel • 2-31 NPLC caching • 2-32 B base library functions • 6-26 beeper • 5-3, 7-7 bit • 5-3 bit functions • 7-8, 7-9, 7-10, 7-11, 7-12, 7-13, 7-14, 7-61 buffer • 5-10 n (number of readings) • 7-24 C calibration commands (quick reference) • B-24 considerations • B-19 equipment • B-20 procedure •
PAGE 860
Index effects on scripts • 8-2 interlock • 9-8 retrieving • 8-2 summary • 8-1 examples contact check • 2-45 digital I/O programming • 3-87 filter programming • 3-5 interactive triggering • 3-56 power programming • 2-43 pulse train • 3-47 reading buffer • 3-18 rel programming • 3-2 single pulse • 3-45 source-measure programming • 2-35 sweep programming • 3-31 TSP-Link synchronization line • 3-91 using attributes • 5-2 extended warranty • 1-1 F factory defaults, restoring • B-4 factory scripts • 5-19 modify
PAGE 861
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual maintenance • A-1 line fuse replacement • A-1 manuals • 1-2, 10-1 master and subordinates • 6-48 node reset • 7-160 node, TSP-Link • 6-56 math library functions • 6-29 measure V or I • 4-21 measurement current accuracy • B-12 voltage accuracy • B-17 multiple instruments, connecting TSP-Link • 6-48, 6-49 multiple SMU connections • 2-55 N named scripts overview • 6-4 running • 6-5, 6-6 node accessing • 6-52 assign number • 6-50 master overview • 6
PAGE 862
Index measurement event • E-24 operation status • E-22 programming example • E-25 questionable status • E-23 reading • E-15 serial polling and SRQ • E-18 service request enable (registers) • E-17 standard event • E-20 status • E-19 system summary • E-19 rel defining a value • 3-1 enabling and disabling • 3-1 front panel • 3-1 remote programming • 3-2 remote command interface selecting • C-15 remote programming command reference • 7-1 instrument programming • 6-1 remote commands • 5-1 reset digio trigger •
PAGE 863
Series 2600B System SourceMeter® Instrument Reference Manual time • 7-177, 7-178 timestamp • 3-11 trigger mode syntax rules • 7-3 triggering • 3-32 configuring attributes • 2-35 digital I/O port and TSP-Link synchronization lines • 3-41 hardware trigger modes • 3-57 interactive triggering • 3-53 local mode • 2-35 remote triggering overview • 3-32 SMU event detectors • 3-39 synchronous triggering modes • 3-61 TSP-Link • 6-53 using the remote trigger model • 3-34 using trigger events • 3-40 troubleshooting e
PAGE 864
Specifications are subject to change without notice. All Keithley trademarks and trade names are the property of Keithley Instruments, Inc. All other trademarks and trade names are the property of their respective companies. A G R E A T E R M E A S U R E O F C O N F I D E N C E Keithley Instruments, Inc. Corporate Headquarters • 28775 Aurora Road • Cleveland, Ohio 44139 • 440-248-0400 • Fax: 440-248-6168 • 1-888-KEITHLEY • www.keithley.